Ricoh Ld435c User Manual
Operating Instructions  
General Settings Guide  
Connecting the Machine  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
System Settings  
Copier / Document Server Features  
Facsimile Features  
Printer Features  
Scanner Features  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Other User Tools  
Appendix  
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the  
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.  
Manuals for This Machine  
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.  
❖ About This Machine  
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.  
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also  
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,  
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.  
❖ General Settings Guide  
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as register-  
ing fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual  
for explanations on how to connect the machine.  
❖ Troubleshooting  
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace  
paper, toner, staples, and other consumables.  
❖ Security Reference  
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security func-  
tions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered, or  
prevent the machine from unauthorized use.  
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as  
well as setting user and administrator authentication.  
❖ Copy/ Document Server Reference  
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to  
this manual for explanations on how to place originals.  
❖ Facsimile Reference  
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.  
❖ Printer Reference  
Explains Printer functions and operations.  
❖ Scanner Reference  
Explains Scanner functions and operations.  
❖ Network Guide  
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environ-  
ment, and use the software provided.  
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and  
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and  
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ  
slightly from those of this machine.  
i
 
❖ Other manuals  
• PostScript3 Supplement  
• UNIX Supplement  
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite  
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide  
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide  
• Auto Document Link Guide  
Note  
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.  
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the  
manuals as PDF files.  
❒ For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized  
dealer.  
❒ "PostScript3 Supplement" and "UNIX Supplement" include descriptions of  
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.  
ii  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Manuals for This Machine......................................................................................i  
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1  
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1  
Display Panel..........................................................................................................2  
Accessing User Tools ...........................................................................................3  
Changing Default Settings .........................................................................................3  
Quitting User Tools ....................................................................................................4  
Menu Protect..............................................................................................................4  
1. Connecting the Machine  
Connecting to the Interfaces ................................................................................5  
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface .........................................................................6  
Connecting to the USB Interface................................................................................8  
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface......................................................................9  
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface....................................................................10  
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface......................................11  
Network Settings..................................................................................................14  
Settings Required to Use the Printer/LAN-Fax ........................................................14  
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax.....................................................................17  
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function ...............................................................21  
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function..................................................25  
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner.........................................28  
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner................................................31  
Settings Required to Use Document Server ............................................................33  
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings .................................................................36  
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone ........................45  
Connecting the Telephone Line ...............................................................................45  
Selecting the Line Type............................................................................................45  
2. System Settings  
General Features..................................................................................................47  
Output tray settings..................................................................................................50  
Tray Paper Settings .............................................................................................51  
Timer Settings......................................................................................................57  
Interface Settings.................................................................................................59  
Network....................................................................................................................59  
Parallel Interface ......................................................................................................63  
IEEE 1394................................................................................................................64  
IEEE 802.11b...........................................................................................................66  
Print List ...................................................................................................................67  
File Transfer .........................................................................................................69  
Administrator Tools.............................................................................................76  
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server ................................................................84  
Programming the LDAP server ................................................................................85  
iii  
3. Copier / Document Server Features  
General Features..................................................................................................91  
Reproduction Ratio..............................................................................................96  
Edit ......................................................................................................................100  
Stamp..................................................................................................................106  
Background Numbering .........................................................................................106  
Preset Stamp .........................................................................................................107  
User Stamp ............................................................................................................110  
Date Stamp ............................................................................................................111  
Page Numbering ....................................................................................................113  
Input/Output .......................................................................................................116  
Adjust Color Image............................................................................................119  
Settings for the Document Server....................................................................120  
4. Facsimile Features  
General Features................................................................................................121  
Scan Settings .....................................................................................................124  
Send Settings.....................................................................................................125  
Reception Settings ............................................................................................128  
Initial Settings ....................................................................................................134  
Reception File Setting .......................................................................................139  
Reception Report e-mail ........................................................................................140  
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size ..............................................................141  
Deleting a scan size...............................................................................................143  
Registering Fax Information .............................................................................144  
Registering Fax Information...................................................................................145  
Changing Fax Information......................................................................................147  
Deleting Fax Information........................................................................................147  
Forwarding .........................................................................................................148  
Programming an End Receiver..............................................................................149  
Quitting the forwarding function .............................................................................151  
Forwarding Mark ....................................................................................................151  
Parameter Settings ............................................................................................152  
Changing the User Parameters..............................................................................158  
Special Senders to Treat Differently ................................................................159  
Authorized Reception.............................................................................................160  
Reception File Print Quantity .................................................................................161  
Forwarding .............................................................................................................161  
Print 2 Sided...........................................................................................................161  
Memory Lock..........................................................................................................162  
Paper Tray .............................................................................................................162  
Programming/Changing Special Senders..............................................................163  
Authorized RX (Authorized Reception) ..................................................................165  
Reception File Print Qty .........................................................................................165  
Forwarding .............................................................................................................166  
Print 2 Sided...........................................................................................................167  
Memory Lock..........................................................................................................167  
Paper Tray per Sender...........................................................................................167  
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender....................................................168  
Deleting a Special Sender......................................................................................171  
iv  
Box Settings.......................................................................................................172  
Programming/Changing Personal Boxes...............................................................172  
Deleting Personal Boxes........................................................................................175  
Programming/Changing Information Boxes ...........................................................176  
Deleting Information Boxes....................................................................................179  
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes................................................................180  
Deleting Transfer Boxes.........................................................................................183  
Printing the Box List ...............................................................................................184  
5. Printer Features  
Test Print ............................................................................................................185  
Printing the configuration page ..............................................................................186  
Maintenance .......................................................................................................188  
System ................................................................................................................189  
Host Interface.....................................................................................................193  
PCL Menu ...........................................................................................................194  
PS Menu..............................................................................................................196  
PDF Menu ...........................................................................................................197  
6. Scanner Features  
General Settings ................................................................................................199  
Scan Settings .....................................................................................................201  
Send Settings.....................................................................................................203  
7. Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner  
Functions  
Address Book.....................................................................................................205  
Managing names in the Address Book ..................................................................208  
Sending fax by Quick Dial......................................................................................208  
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial.................................................................................208  
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly...................................................209  
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine ...........209  
Managing users and machine usage .....................................................................209  
Registering Names ............................................................................................210  
Registering Names.................................................................................................210  
Changing a Registered Name................................................................................212  
Deleting a Registered Name..................................................................................213  
Authentication Information...............................................................................214  
Registering a User Code........................................................................................215  
Changing a User Code...........................................................................................216  
Deleting a User Code.............................................................................................218  
Displaying the Counter for Each User....................................................................219  
Printing the Counter for Each User ........................................................................219  
Printing the Counter for All Users...........................................................................221  
Clearing the Number of Prints................................................................................222  
Fax Destination ..................................................................................................223  
Fax Destination ......................................................................................................225  
IP-Fax Destination..................................................................................................231  
v
E-mail Destination..............................................................................................236  
Registering an E-mail Destination..........................................................................236  
Changing an E-mail Destination.............................................................................238  
Deleting an E-mail Destination...............................................................................239  
Registering Folders ...........................................................................................240  
Using SMB to Connect...........................................................................................240  
Using FTP to Connect............................................................................................246  
Using NCP to Connect...........................................................................................251  
Registering Names to a Group .........................................................................257  
Registering a Group...............................................................................................257  
Registering Names to a Group...............................................................................258  
Adding a Group to Another Group .........................................................................260  
Displaying Names Registered in a Group..............................................................261  
Removing a Name from a Group ...........................................................................262  
Deleting a Group Within Another Group ................................................................263  
Changing a Group Name .......................................................................................265  
Deleting a Group....................................................................................................266  
Registering a Protection Code .........................................................................267  
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User.....................................................267  
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User.....................................................269  
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication..................................................270  
SMTP Authentication .............................................................................................270  
LDAP Authentication..............................................................................................272  
8. Other User Tools  
Maintenance .......................................................................................................275  
Changing the Display Language ......................................................................276  
Inquiry.................................................................................................................277  
Counter ...............................................................................................................279  
Displaying the Total Counter..................................................................................279  
9. Appendix  
Specifications for the Main Unit .......................................................................281  
Specifications for Options ................................................................................286  
Information about Installed Software...............................................................292  
expat ......................................................................................................................292  
NetBSD ..................................................................................................................292  
Sablotron................................................................................................................294  
JPEG LIBRARY .....................................................................................................295  
SASL......................................................................................................................295  
MD4........................................................................................................................296  
MD5........................................................................................................................296  
Samba(Ver 3.0.4)...................................................................................................297  
®
RSA BSAFE .........................................................................................................297  
Open SSL...............................................................................................................298  
Open SSH..............................................................................................................303  
Open LDAP............................................................................................................308  
INDEX....................................................................................................... 310  
vi  
How to Read This Manual  
Symbols  
This manual uses the following symbols:  
Indicates important safety notes.  
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these  
notes. They can be found in the "Safety Information" section of About This Ma-  
chine.  
Indicates important safety notes.  
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the ma-  
chine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the "Safety  
Information" section of About This Machine.  
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations  
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure  
to read these explanations.  
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions  
on resolving user errors.  
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find fur-  
ther relevant information.  
[ ]  
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine’s display panel.  
{ }  
Indicates the names of keys on the machine’s control panel.  
1
   
Display Panel  
The display panel shows machine status, error messages, and function menus.  
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an  
item by lightly pressing them.  
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like  
. Keys appearing as  
cannot be used.  
Important  
❒ A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display  
panel.  
To display the following screen, press the {User Tools/Counter} key to display the  
User Tools menu, and then press [System Settings].  
Using the System Settings menu screen as an example, this section explains how  
to use the machine’s display panel.  
AQT006S  
1. The menu tabs for various set-  
tings appear. To display the setting  
you want to specify or change, press  
the appropriate menu tab.  
2. A list of settings appears. To spec-  
ify or change a setting, press the ap-  
propriate key in the list.  
3. Press this to quit the User Tools  
menu.  
2
   
Accessing User Tools  
User Tools allow you to change or set defaults.  
Note  
❒ Operations for system settings differ from normal operations. Always quit  
User Tools when you have finished.  
❒ Any changes you make with User Tools remain in effect even if the main  
power switch or operation switch is turned off, or the {Energy Saver} or {Clear  
Modes} key is pressed.  
❒ Default settings are shown in bold type.  
Reference  
p.4 “Quitting User Tools”  
Changing Default Settings  
This section describes how to change the settings of User Tools.  
Important  
❒ If Administrator Authentication Management is specified, contact your ad-  
ministrator.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
AQT007S  
B Select the menu.  
To change the System Settings, press [System Settings].  
To change the Copier / Document Server Features, press [Copier / Document  
Server Features].  
To change the Facsimile Features, press [Facsimile Features].  
To change the Printer Features, press [Printer Features].  
To change the Scanner Features, press [Scanner Features].  
To adjust color registration or gradation, press [Maintenance].  
To change the language used on the display, press [Español].  
To check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs, or to order consum-  
ables, press [Inquiry].  
To check the counter, press [Counter].  
3
     
C Select the user tool you want to change.  
D Change settings by following instructions on the display, and then press  
[OK].  
Note  
❒ To cancel changes made to settings and return to the initial display, press  
the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Reference  
p.47 “System Settings”  
p.91 “Copier / Document Server Features”  
p.121 “Facsimile Features”  
p.185 “Printer Features”  
p.199 “Scanner Features”  
p.275 “Other User Tools”  
Quitting User Tools  
This section describes how to end User Tools.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
AQT007S  
Note  
❒ You can also quit User Tools by pressing [Exit].  
Menu Protect  
Using Menu Protect, you can prevent unauthenticated users from changing the  
user tools. Menu Protect can be specified for each of the following user tools  
menus.  
• Copier / Document Server Features  
• Facsimile Features  
• Printer Features  
• Scanner Features  
For details, consult your administrator.  
4
     
1. Connecting the Machine  
This chapter describes how to connect the machine to the network and specify  
the network settings.  
Connecting to the Interfaces  
This section explains how to identify the machine’s interface and connect the  
machine according to the network environment.  
AQT002S  
1. IEEE 1394 ports (optional)  
5. Wireless LAN port (optional)  
Ports for connecting the IEEE 1394 inter-  
face cable  
Port for using the wireless LAN  
Note  
2. USB2.0 port  
Port for connecting the USB2.0 interface  
cable  
❒ You cannot install two or more of the  
options below: IEEE 1394 interface  
board, IEEE 1284 interface board,  
IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN  
3. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port  
Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or  
100BASE-TX cable  
4. IEEE 1284 port (optional)  
Port for connecting the IEEE 1284 inter-  
face cable  
5
     
Connecting the Machine  
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface  
Connect 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable to the Ethernet interface.  
Important  
1
❒ If the main power switch is on, turn it off.  
A A ferrite core for the Ethernet cable is supplied with this machine. Make a  
loop in the cable about 3cm (1.2 inch) (1) from the machine end of the cable.  
Attach the ferrite core.  
AEV047S  
B Make sure the main power switch of the machine is off.  
C Connect the Ethernet interface cable to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port.  
AQS015S  
D Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a network connection device  
such as a hub.  
6
   
Connecting to the Interfaces  
E Turn on the main power switch of the machine.  
1
AME005S  
A Indicator (green)  
Lights up green when the machine is connected correctly to the network.  
B Indicator (yellow)  
Lights up yellow when 100 BASE-TX is in operation. Goes off when 10  
BASE-T is in operation.  
Note  
❒ For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",  
Printer Reference.  
Reference  
"Turning On the Power", About This Machine  
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference  
7
Connecting the Machine  
Connecting to the USB Interface  
Connect the USB2.0 interface cable to the USB2.0 port.  
A Connect the USB2.0 interface cable to the USB2.0 port.  
1
AQS014S  
B Connect the other end to the USB2.0 port on the host computer.  
Note  
❒ This machine does not come with a USB interface cable. Make sure you  
purchase the appropriate cable for the machine and your computer.  
❒ The USB2.0 interface board is supported by Windows Me / 2000 / XP, Win-  
dows Server 2003, Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher.  
• For Windows Me:  
Make sure to install "USB Printing Support". When used with Windows  
Me, only a speed equal to that of USB1.1 is possible.  
• For Mac OS:  
To use Macintosh, the machine must be equipped with the optional  
PostScript 3 unit. When used with Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher, a transfer  
speed of USB2.0 is supported.  
❒ For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",  
Printer Reference.  
Reference  
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference  
8
   
Connecting to the Interfaces  
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface  
Connect the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 interface board.  
A Connect the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 port.  
1
AQS016S  
B Connect the other end of the cable into the interface connector on the host  
computer.  
Check the shape of the connector to the computer. Connect the cable firmly.  
Note  
❒ Use the interface cable supplied with the IEEE 1394 interface board.  
❒ Two interface ports are available for connecting the IEEE 1394 interface cable.  
Either is one can be used.  
❒ For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",  
Printer Reference.  
Reference  
"Turning On the Power", About This Machine  
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference  
9
   
Connecting the Machine  
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface  
Connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 interface board.  
A Make sure the main power switch on the machine is off.  
B Turn off the main power switch of the host computer.  
C Connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 port.  
1
AQS017S  
Use the conversion connector (1) supplied with the IEEE 1284 interface board.  
D Connect the other end of the cable into the interface connector on the host  
computer.  
Check the shape of the connector to the computer. Connect the cable firmly.  
E Turn on the main power switch of the machine.  
F Turn on the host computer.  
When using Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, a  
printer driver installation screen might appear when the computer is turned  
on. If this happens, click [Cancel] on the screen.  
Note  
❒ For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",  
Printer Reference.  
Reference  
"Turning On the Power", About This Machine  
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference  
10  
   
Connecting to the Interfaces  
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface  
Connect to the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface.  
Note  
1
❒ Check the settings of the IPv4 address and subnet mask of this machine.  
❒ For details about how to set the IPv4 address and subnet mask from the con-  
trol panel of the machine, see "Interface Settings".  
Reference  
p.59 “Network”  
Setup Procedure  
Set up IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) according to the following procedure:  
AME006S  
11  
     
Connecting the Machine  
Note  
❒ Select [802.11 Ad-hoc Mode] mode when connecting Windows XP as a wireless  
LAN client using Windows XP standard driver or utilities, or when not using  
the infrastructure mode.  
1
❒ You can specify either "WEP" or "WPA" to the Security Method.  
❒ Specify "WPA", when [Communication Mode] is set to [Infrastructure Mode].  
❒ For details about how to specify wireless LAN settings from the control panel  
on the machine, see "IEEE 802.11b".  
❒ For details about how to specify wireless LAN settings from other than the  
control panel on the machine, see "Using Utilities to Make Network Settings".  
❒ For details about the setting items, see "IEEE 802.11b".  
Reference  
p.66 “IEEE 802.11b”  
p.36 “Using Utilities to Make Network Settings”  
Checking the Connection  
Check the wireless LAN connection.  
Make sure the LED of the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is lit.  
❖ When using in infrastructure mode  
1
2
ZGDH600J  
1. If [LAN Type] on the [Interface Settings] / [Network] screen is not set to [IEEE  
802.11b], it does not light, even if the main power is on.  
2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in infra-  
structure mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching for devices.  
12  
 
Connecting to the Interfaces  
❖ When using in adhoc mode / 802.11 ad hoc mode  
1
1
2
ZGDH600J  
1. If the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is functioning, the LED lights up in orange.  
2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in ad hoc  
mode or 802.11 ad hoc mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching  
for devices. The LED will light after a few seconds.  
Print the configuration page to verify settings.  
Note  
❒ For more information about printing a configuration page, see "Print List".  
Reference  
p.186 “Printing the configuration page”  
Checking the Signal  
When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave sta-  
tus using the control panel.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Interface Settings].  
C Press [IEEE 802.11b].  
D Press [Wireless LAN Signal].  
The machine's radio wave status appears.  
E After checking radio wave status, press [Exit].  
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key to return to the User Tools / Counter / Inquiry  
menu.  
Note  
❒ To check the radio wave status, press [IEEE 802.11b] under [LAN Type] in Net-  
work menu of Interface Settings.  
Reference  
p.36 “Using Utilities to Make Network Settings”  
p.66 “IEEE 802.11b”  
13  
 
Connecting the Machine  
Network Settings  
This section describes the network settings you can change with User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings). Make settings according to functions you want to use and the in-  
terface to be connected.  
1
Important  
❒ These settings should be made by the system administrator, or with the ad-  
vice of the system administrator.  
Settings Required to Use the Printer/LAN-Fax  
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function.  
Ethernet  
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function  
with an Ethernet connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv6 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv6 Gateway Address  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/Network IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfigu-  
ration  
As required  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network NCP Delivery Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network NW Frame Type  
Interface Settings/Network SMB Computer Name  
Interface Settings/Network SMB Work Group  
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
14  
         
Network Settings  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Interface Settings/Network Machine Name  
As required  
Note  
❒ IPv6 can be used only for the printer function.  
1
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN board is installed. If Ethernet  
and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected, the selected interface  
has priority.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)  
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function  
with an IEEE 1394 connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Note  
❒ [IEEE 1394] appears when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
15  
 
Connecting the Machine  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)  
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function  
with an IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.  
1
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv6 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv6 Gateway Address  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/Network IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfigu-  
ration  
As required  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network NCP Delivery Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network NW Frame Type  
Interface Settings/Network SMB Computer Name  
Interface Settings/Network SMB Work Group  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine Name  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Communication Mode  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
SSID Setting  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Channel  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Security Method  
Transmission Speed  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
16  
 
Network Settings  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface  
board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are con-  
nected, the selected interface takes precedence.  
1
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax  
This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax.  
Ethernet  
This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax with an Ethernet  
connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
Necessary  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
SMTP Server  
SMTP Authentication  
POP before SMTP  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Reception Protocol  
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings  
Administrator's E-mail Address  
E-mail Communication Port  
17  
     
Connecting the Machine  
Menu  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
User Tool  
E-mail Reception Interval  
Max. Reception E-mail Size  
E-mail Storage in Server  
Setting Requirements  
As required  
As required  
As required  
1
Program / Change /  
Delete E-mail Message  
As required  
File Transfer  
Fax E-mail Account  
Necessary  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If  
both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected in-  
terface takes precedence.  
❒ SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to send In-  
ternet Fax.  
❒ When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Proto-  
col and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.  
❒ When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], also make setting for Administra-  
tor's E-mail Address.  
❒ E-mail Communication Port and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in or-  
der to use the reception function.  
❒ When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail  
Communication Port.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)  
This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax with an IEEE 1394  
connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394  
18  
 
Network Settings  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
As required  
Necessary  
1
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
SMTP Server  
Necessary  
SMTP Authentication  
POP before SMTP  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Reception Protocol  
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings  
Administrator's E-mail Address  
E-mail Communication Port  
E-mail Reception Interval  
Max. Reception E-mail Size  
E-mail Storage in Server  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Program / Change /  
Delete E-mail Message  
File Transfer  
Fax E-mail Account  
Necessary  
Note  
❒ [IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the  
send function.  
❒ When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Proto-  
col and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.  
❒ When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], also make setting for Administra-  
tor's E-mail Address.  
❒ E-mail Communication Port and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in or-  
der to use the reception function.  
❒ When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail  
Communication Port.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
19  
Connecting the Machine  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)  
This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax with an IEEE  
802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.  
1
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
Necessary  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Communication Mode  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
SSID Setting  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Channel  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Security Method  
Transmission Speed  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
SMTP Server  
Necessary  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
SMTP Authentication  
POP before SMTP  
Reception Protocol  
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings  
Administrator's E-mail Address  
E-mail Communication Port  
E-mail Reception Interval  
Max. Reception E-mail Size  
E-mail Storage in Server  
As required  
As required  
As required  
20  
 
Network Settings  
Menu  
File Transfer  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Program / Change /  
Delete E-mail Message  
As required  
File Transfer  
Fax E-mail Account  
Necessary  
1
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface  
board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are con-  
nected, the selected interface takes precedence.  
❒ SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the  
send function.  
❒ When POP before SMTP is set to [On], you must also make settings for Recep-  
tion Protocol and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.  
❒ When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], you must also make settings for  
Administrator's E-mail Address.  
❒ E-mail Communication Port and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in or-  
der to use the reception function.  
❒ When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail  
Communication Port.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function  
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail.  
Ethernet  
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with an Ethernet con-  
nection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
Necessary  
As required  
As required  
As required  
21  
   
Connecting the Machine  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed  
As required  
Necessary  
1
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
SMTP Server  
SMTP Authentication  
POP before SMTP  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Reception Protocol  
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings  
Administrator's E-mail Address  
E-mail Communication Port  
Program / Change /  
Delete E-mail Message  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
Scanner Resend Interval Time  
Number of Scanner Resends  
As required  
As required  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If  
both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected in-  
terface takes precedence.  
❒ When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Proto-  
col and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.  
❒ When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail  
Communication Port.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
22  
Network Settings  
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)  
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with an IEEE 1394 con-  
nection.  
1
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Necessary  
As required  
Necessary  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
SMTP Server  
Necessary  
SMTP Authentication  
POP before SMTP  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Reception Protocol  
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings  
Administrator's E-mail Address  
E-mail Communication Port  
Program / Change /  
Delete E-mail Message  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
Scanner Resend Interval Time  
Number of Scanner Resends  
As required  
As required  
Note  
❒ [IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Proto-  
col and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.  
❒ When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail  
Communication Port.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
23  
 
Connecting the Machine  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)  
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with an IEEE 802.11b  
(wireless LAN) connection.  
1
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
Necessary  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Communication Mode  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
SSID Setting  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Channel  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Security Method  
Transmission Speed  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
SMTP Server  
Necessary  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
SMTP Authentication  
POP before SMTP  
Reception Protocol  
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings  
Administrator's E-mail Address  
E-mail Communication Port  
Program / Change /  
Delete E-mail Message  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
Scanner Resend Interval Time  
Number of Scanner Resends  
As required  
As required  
24  
 
Network Settings  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If  
both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected in-  
terface takes precedence.  
1
❒ When POP before SMTP is set to [On], you must also make settings for Recep-  
tion Protocol and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.  
❒ When setting POP before SMTP to On, check POP3 port number in E-mail  
Communication Port.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function  
This section lists the settings required for sending files.  
Ethernet  
This section lists the settings required for sending files with an Ethernet connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
Necessary  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
Scanner Resend Interval Time  
Number of Scanner Resends  
25  
     
Connecting the Machine  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If  
both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected in-  
terface takes precedence.  
1
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)  
This section lists the settings required for sending files with an IEEE 1394 connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Necessary  
As required  
Necessary  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
Scanner Resend Interval Time  
Number of Scanner Resends  
As required  
As required  
Note  
❒ [IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
26  
 
Network Settings  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)  
This section lists the settings required for sending files with an IEEE 802.11b  
(wireless LAN) connection.  
1
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
Necessary  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Communication Mode  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
SSID Setting  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Channel  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Security Method  
Transmission Speed  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
Scanner Resend Interval Time  
Number of Scanner Resends  
As required  
As required  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface  
board is installed. If both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are con-  
nected, the selected interface takes precedence.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
27  
 
Connecting the Machine  
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner  
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network.  
1
Ethernet  
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network with an  
Ethernet connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
Delivery Option  
Fax RX File Transmission  
Scanner Resend Interval Time  
Number of Scanner Resends  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed.  
When both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the se-  
lected interface takes precedence.  
❒ If Delivery Option is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is specified.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
28  
     
Network Settings  
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)  
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network with an  
IEEE 1394 connection.  
1
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
Delivery Option  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Fax RX File Transmission  
Scanner Resend Interval Time  
Number of Scanner Resends  
Note  
❒ [IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ If Delivery Option is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is specified.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
29  
 
Connecting the Machine  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)  
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network with an  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.  
1
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Communication Mode  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
SSID Setting  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Channel  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Security Method  
Transmission Speed  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
Delivery Option  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Fax RX File Transmission  
Scanner Resend Interval Time  
Number of Scanner Resends  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface  
board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are  
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.  
❒ If Delivery Option is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is specified.  
30  
 
Network Settings  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
p.69 “File Transfer”  
1
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner  
This section lists the settings required for using TWAIN Scanner under the net-  
work environment.  
Ethernet  
This section lists the settings required for using network TWAIN Scanner with  
an Ethernet connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed.  
When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the se-  
lected interface takes precedence.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
31  
     
Connecting the Machine  
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)  
This section lists the settings required for using network TWAIN Scanner with  
an IEEE 1394 connection.  
1
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File  
Transfer".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Note  
❒ [IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)  
This section lists the settings required for using network TWAIN Scanner with  
an IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
As required  
32  
   
Network Settings  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
As required  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Communication Mode  
Necessary  
1
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
SSID Setting  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Channel  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Security Method  
Transmission Speed  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface  
board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are  
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
Settings Required to Use Document Server  
This section lists the settings required for using Document Server function under  
the network environment.  
Ethernet  
This section lists the settings required for using Document Server function with  
an Ethernet connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
33  
     
Connecting the Machine  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
As required  
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
1
As required  
As required  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed.  
When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the se-  
lected interface takes precedence.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)  
This section lists the settings required for using Document Server function with  
an IEEE 1394 connection.  
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
As required  
As required  
Necessary  
Note  
❒ [IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
34  
 
Network Settings  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)  
This section lists the settings required for using Document Server function with  
an IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.  
1
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".  
Menu  
User Tool  
Setting Requirements  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address  
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address  
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration  
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol  
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type  
As required  
Necessary  
As required/Necessary  
As required  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Interface Settings/Network Host Name  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Communication Mode  
Necessary  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
SSID Setting  
As required  
As required  
As required  
As required  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Channel  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Security Method  
Transmission Speed  
Interface Settings/  
IEEE 802.11b  
Note  
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is  
set to [Active].  
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface  
board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are  
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.  
Reference  
p.59 “Interface Settings”  
35  
 
Connecting the Machine  
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings  
You can also specify network settings using utilities such as Web Image Monitor,  
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, and telnet.  
1
Note  
❒ For details about using Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image Monitor",  
Network Guide.  
❒ For details about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see "Using SmartDe-  
viceMonitor for Admin", Network Guide.  
❒ For Details about using telnet, see "Remote Maintenance", Network Guide.  
Reference  
"Using Web Image Monitor", Network Guide  
"Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin", Network Guide  
"Remote Maintenance by telnet", Network Guide  
Interface Settings  
Change settings by using Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin,  
and telnet.  
❖ [Network] → [Machine IPv4 Address] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Machine IPv4 Address] → [Specify] → [IPv4 Address]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Machine IPv4 Address] → [Specify] → [Sub-net Mask]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [IPv4 Gateway Address]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
36  
     
Network Settings  
❖ [Network] → [Machine IPv6 Address] → [Manual Configuration Address]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
1
❖ [Network] → [IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [DNS Configuration] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [DNS Configuration] → [Specify] → [DNS Server 1-3]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [DDNS Configuration]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Domain Name] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Domain Name] → [Specify] → [Domain Name]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Primary WINS Server]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
37  
Connecting the Machine  
❖ [Network] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Secondary WINS Server]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
1
❖ [Network] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Scope ID]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [IPv4]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: You can specify the TCP/IP settings if  
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is communicating with the machine using  
IPX/SPX.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [IPv6]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [NetWare]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: You can specify the IPX/SPX settings if  
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is communicating with the machine using  
TCP/IP.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [SMB]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [AppleTalk]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [NCP Delivery Protocol]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
38  
Network Settings  
❖ [Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Auto Select]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
1
❖ [Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet II]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet 802.2]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet 802.3]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet SNAP]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [SMB Computer Name]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [SMB Work Group]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Ethernet Speed]  
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
39  
Connecting the Machine  
❖ [Network] → [LAN Type] → [Ethernet]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
1
❖ [Network] → [LAN Type] → [IEEE 802.11b]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Host Name]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [Network] → [Machine Name]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 1394] → [IPv4 Address] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 1394] → [IPv4 Address] → [Specify] → [Machine IPv4 Address]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 1394] → [IPv4 Address] → [Specify] → [Sub-net Mask]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 1394] → [DDNS Configuration]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
40  
Network Settings  
❖ [IEEE 1394] → [IPv4 over 1394]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
1
❖ [IEEE 1394] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Primary WINS Server]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 1394] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Secondary WINS Server]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 1394] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Scope ID]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 1394] → [Host Name]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 1394] → [Domain Name]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 802.11b] → [Communication Mode]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 802.11b] → [SSID Setting]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
41  
Connecting the Machine  
❖ [IEEE 802.11b] → [Channel]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
1
❖ [IEEE 802.11b] → [Security Method]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [IEEE 802.11b] → [Transmission Speed]  
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [SMTP Server]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [SMTP Authentication]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [POP before SMTP]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [Reception Protocol]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
42  
Network Settings  
❖ [File Transfer] → [Administrator's E-mail Address]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
1
❖ [File Transfer] → [E-mail Communication Port]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [E-mail Reception Interval]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [Max. Reception E-mail Size]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [E-mail Storage in Server]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [Default User Name / Password (Send)]  
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [Fax E-mail Account]  
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
❖ [File Transfer] → [Scanner Resend Interval Time]  
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
43  
Connecting the Machine  
❖ [File Transfer] → [Number of Scanner Resends]  
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.  
1
44  
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone  
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone  
Line and Telephone  
1
This section describes how to connect the machine to the telephone lines and se-  
lect the line type.  
Connecting the Telephone Line  
To connect the machine to a telephone line, use a snap-in modular type connector.  
Important  
❒ Make sure the connector is the correct type before you start.  
AQT003S  
1. External telephone connector  
2. G3 interface unit connector  
3. Extra G3 interface unit connector  
Selecting the Line Type  
Select the line type to which the machine is connected. There are two types: tone  
and pulse dial.  
Select the line type using Administrator Tools.  
Note  
❒ This function is not available in some regions.  
Reference  
p.135 “Select Dial / Push Phone”  
45  
         
Connecting the Machine  
1
46  
2. System Settings  
This chapter describes user tools in the System Settings menu. For details on  
how to access System Settings, see "Accessing User tools (System Settings)".  
General Features  
This section describes the user tools in the General Features menu under System  
Settings.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Program / Change / Delete User Text  
You can register text phrases you often use when specifying settings, such as  
".com" and "Regards".  
You can register up to 40 entries.  
• Program / Change  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Check that [General Features] is selected.  
C Press [Program / Change / Delete User Text].  
D Press [Program / Change]  
E Select the user text you want to change.  
To program new user text, press [Not Programmed].  
F Press [OK].  
G Press [Exit].  
• Delete  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Check that [General Features] is selected.  
C Press [Program / Change / Delete User Text].  
D Press [Delete].  
E Select the user text you want to delete.  
F Press [Clear].  
G Press [Exit].  
❖ Panel key Sound  
The beeper (key tone) sounds when a key is pressed.  
• On  
• Off  
47  
       
System Settings  
❖ Warm-Up Beeper (copier/Document Server)  
You can have the beeper sound when the machine becomes ready to copy af-  
ter leaving Energy Saver mode, or when the power is turned on.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Copy Count Display (copier/Document Server)  
The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies made (count up) or  
the number of copies yet to be made (count down).  
2
• Up  
• Down  
❖ Function Priority  
Specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation switch is  
turned on, or when System Reset mode is turned on.  
• Copier  
• Document Server  
• Fax  
• Printer  
• Scanner  
❖ Print Priority  
Print Priority is given to the mode selected.  
• Display Mode  
• Copier/Document Server  
• Facsimile  
• Printer  
• Interleave  
• Job Order  
When [Interleave] is selected, the current print job will be interrupted after a  
maximum of five sheets.  
❖ Function Reset Timer  
You can set the length of time the machine waits before changing modes  
when using the multi-access function.  
This is useful if you are making many copies and have to change settings for  
each copy. If you set a longer reset period, you can prevent interruption from  
other functions.  
• Set Time  
• Immediate  
When you select [Set Time], enter the time (3–30 seconds, in 1 second incre-  
ments) using the number keys.  
The default setting is 3 second(s).  
48  
General Features  
❖ Output: Copier (copier)  
Specify a tray to which documents are delivered.  
2
AQT004S  
1. Finisher Upper Tray  
2. Finisher Shift Tray  
3. Finisher Upper Tray  
4. Finisher Shift Tray  
5. Finisher Upper Tray  
6. Finisher Shift Tray  
7. Finisher Booklet Tray  
8. Internal Tray 1  
9. Internal Tray 2  
❖ Output: Document Server (Document Server)  
Specify a tray to which documents are delivered.  
• Internal Tray 1  
• Internal Tray 2  
• Finisher Upper Tray  
• Finisher Shift Tray  
❖ Output: Facsimile (facsimile)  
Specify a tray to which documents are delivered.  
• Internal Tray 1  
• Internal Tray 2  
• Finisher Upper Tray  
• Finisher Shift Tray  
49  
 
System Settings  
❖ Output: Printer (printer)  
Specify a tray to which documents are delivered.  
The output trays set on the printer driver have priority over the output tray  
specified below.  
• Internal Tray 1  
• Internal Tray 2  
• Finisher Upper Tray  
• Finisher Shift Tray  
2
❖ System Status/Job List Display Time  
Specify how long to display the System Status and Job List display for.  
• On: 60 second(s)  
• Off  
By selecting [On], you can specify a display time between 10 and 999 seconds.  
❖ Key Repeat  
You can enable or disable repetition of an operation if a key on the screen or  
control panel is pressed continuously.  
• Off  
• Normal  
• Repeat Time: Medium  
• Repeat Time: Long  
Note  
❒ If the Panel Tone setting is [Off], the beeper does not sound, whatever the Warm  
Up Notice setting.  
❒ The Function Reset Timer setting is ignored if Interleave is set for Print Priority.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
"Function Compatibility", Copy/Document Server Reference  
Output tray settings  
Important  
❒ You cannot interrupt the current stapling job even if a stapling job is specified  
by a different function.  
❒ When the 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher, or booklet finisher is in-  
stalled and Staple or Shift Sort is specified for a job, the job will be delivered  
to the finisher shift tray regardless of the output tray specified.  
50  
   
Tray Paper Settings  
Tray Paper Settings  
This section describes the user tools in the Tray Paper Settings menu under Sys-  
tem Settings.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
Important  
2
❒ If the specified paper size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded in  
the paper tray, a misfeed might occur because the correct paper size was not  
detected.  
❖ Paper Tray Priority: Copier (copier/Document Server)  
Specify the tray to supply paper for output.  
• Tray 1  
• Tray 2  
• Tray 3 (optional)  
• Tray 4 (optional)  
When optional paper tray unit is installed, [Tray 3] and [Tray 4]is displayed.  
When optional LCT is installed, [Tray 3] is displayed.  
❖ Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile (facsimile)  
Specify the tray to supply paper for output.  
• Tray 1  
• Tray 2  
• Tray 3 (optional)  
• Tray 4 (optional)  
When optional paper tray unit is installed, [Tray 3] and [Tray 4]is displayed.  
When optional LCT is installed, [Tray 3] is displayed.  
❖ Paper Tray Priority: Printer (printer)  
Specify the tray to supply paper for output.  
• Tray 1  
• Tray 2  
• Tray 3 (optional)  
• Tray 4 (optional)  
When optional paper tray unit is installed, [Tray 3] and [Tray 4]is displayed.  
When optional LCT is installed, [Tray 3] is displayed.  
51  
   
System Settings  
❖ Tray Paper Size: Tray 2-4  
Select the size of the paper loaded in the paper tray.  
The paper guide for the optional LCT is fixed for A4K, 81/2"×11"K size pa-  
per. Contact your service representative if you need to change the paper size.  
❖ The paper sizes you can set for tray 2 are as follows:  
• Metric version:  
"Auto Detect", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK",  
"B5JISL", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L",  
"81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L", "8×13L", "8×10L",  
"71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"  
2
• Inch version  
"Auto Detect", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L",  
"81/2×13L", "81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L",  
"8×13L", "8×10L", "71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "A3L", "A4K",  
"A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK", "B5JISL", "8KL", "16KK",  
"16KL"  
❖ The paper sizes you can set for tray 3 are as follows:  
When optional paper tray unit is installed:  
• Metric version  
"Auto Detect", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK",  
"B5JISL", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L",  
"81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L", "8×13L", "8×10L",  
"71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"  
• Inch version  
"Auto Detect", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L",  
"81/2×13L", 81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L",  
"8×13L", "8×10L", "71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "A3L", "A4K",  
"A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK", "B5JISL", "8KL", "16KK",  
"16KL"  
When optional LCT is installed:  
"A4K", "81/2×11K"  
❖ The paper sizes you can set for tray 4 are as follows:  
• Metric version  
"Auto Detect", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK",  
"B5JISL", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L",  
"81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L", "8×13L", "8×10L",  
"71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"  
• Inch version  
"Auto Detect", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L",  
"81/2×13L", "81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L",  
"8×13L", "8×10L", "71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "A3L", "A4K",  
"A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK", "B5JISL", "8KL", "16KK",  
"16KL"  
52  
Tray Paper Settings  
❖ Printer Bypass Paper Size  
Specify the size of the paper in the bypass tray when printing data from the computer.  
❖ The paper sizes you can set for bypass tray are as follows:  
• Metric version  
"Auto Detect", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L", "A6L", "B4JISL",  
"B5JISK", "B5JISL", "B6JISL", "C5 EnvK", "C6 EnvK", "DL EnvK",  
"12×18L", "11×17L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L", "81/2×11K", "81/2×11L",  
"81/4×13L", "8×13L", "71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "51/2×81/2L",  
"41/8×91/2K", "37/8×71/2K", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"  
Specify a custom size of between 90.0-305.0mm vertically, and between  
148.0-600.0mm horizontally.  
2
• Inch version  
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L",  
"81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×13L", "8×13L", "71/4×101/2K",  
"71/4×101/2L", "51/2×81/2L", "41/8×91/2K", "37/8×71/2K", "A3L",  
"A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L", "A6L", "B4JISL", "B5JISK", "B5JISL",  
"B6JISL", "C5 EnvK", "C6 EnvK", "DL EnvK", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"  
Specify a custom size of between 3.55"-12.00" vertically, and between  
5.83"-23.62" horizontally.  
❖ Paper Type: Bypass Tray  
Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in the bypass tray.  
• Paper Type  
• No Display  
• Recycled Paper  
• Color Paper  
• Letterhead  
• Label Paper  
• OHP (Transparency)  
• Special Paper 1  
• Special Paper 2  
• Special Paper 3  
• Cardstock  
• Preprinted Paper  
• Bond Paper  
• Paper Thickness  
• Thin Paper  
• Plain Paper (60-81g/m2, 16-22lb.)  
• Middle Thick (82-105g/m2, 22-28lb.)  
• Thick Paper 1 (106-169g/m2, 28.5-44.9lb.)  
• Thick Paper 2 (170-219g/m2, 45-58lb.)  
• Thick Paper 3 (220-253g/m2, 58.5-67lb.)  
53  
System Settings  
❖ Paper Type: Tray 1-4  
Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in each paper  
tray. The print functions use this information to automatically select the pa-  
per tray.  
• Paper Type  
• No Display  
• Recycled Paper  
2
• Color Paper  
• Letterhead  
• Special Paper 1  
• Special Paper 2  
• Special Paper 3  
• Cardstock  
• Preprinted Paper  
• Bond Paper  
• Paper Thickness  
• Thin Paper  
• Plain Paper (60-81g/m2, 16-22lb.)  
• Middle Thick (82-105g/m2, 22-28lb.)  
• Thick Paper 1 (106-169g/m2, 28.5-44.9lb.)  
• Thick Paper 2 (170-219g/m2, 45-58lb.)  
• Copying Method in Duplex  
• 2 Sided Copy  
• 1 Sided Copy  
• Apply Auto Paper Select  
• Yes  
• No  
54  
Tray Paper Settings  
❖ Cover Sheet Tray  
Allows you to specify and display the paper tray that is setting cover sheets.  
After selecting the paper tray, you can also specify the display timing and  
copy method for two-sided copying.  
• Tray to Program  
• Off  
• Bypass Tray  
• Tray 1  
2
• Tray 2  
• Tray 3 (optional)  
• Tray 4 (optional)  
• Copying Method in Duplex  
• 2 Sided Copy  
• 1 Sided Copy  
• Display Time  
• At Mode Selected  
• Full Time  
❖ Slip Sheet Tray  
Allows you to specify and display the paper tray that is inserting slip sheets.  
After selecting the paper tray, you can also specify the display timing and  
copy method for two-sided copying.  
• Tray to Program  
• Off  
• Bypass Tray  
• Tray 1  
• Tray 2  
• Tray 3 (optional)  
• Tray 4 (optional)  
• Copying Method in Duplex  
• 2 Sided Copy  
• 1 Sided Copy  
• Display Time  
• At Mode Selected  
• Full Time  
55  
System Settings  
Note  
❒ When paper of the same type and size is loaded in two different paper trays  
and you want to specify tray for 2 Sided Copy and tray for 1 Sided Copy,  
specify the upper tray for 2 Sided Copy. If one of the trays is specified as the  
default in Paper Tray Priority, assign 2 Sided Copy to that tray.  
❒ A mark appears next to the paper tray if [Off] is selected in [Auto Paper Se-  
lect].  
2
❒ [Auto Paper Select] can only be selected for the copier function if [No Display]  
and [Recycled Paper] are selected. If [No] is selected, Auto Paper Select is not  
valid for the tray.  
❒ Functions using the cover sheet tray setting are the front cover function and  
front/back cover function.  
❒ If you set "Display Time" to "At Mode Selected" in "Cover Sheet Tray" and  
"Slip Sheet Tray", the trays selected for the cover sheets and slip sheets are in-  
dicated only if you have enabled the use of cover sheets and slip sheets.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
"Covers", Copy/ Document Server Reference  
"Slip Sheets", Copy/ Document Server Reference  
56  
Timer Settings  
Timer Settings  
This section describes the user tools in the Timer Settings menu under System  
Settings.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Auto Off Timer  
2
After a specified period has passed, following job completion, the machine auto-  
matically turns off, in order to conserve energy. This function is called "Auto Off".  
The machine status after the Auto Off operation is referred to as "Off mode", or  
"Sleep mode". For the Auto Off Timer, specify the time to elapse before Auto Off.  
The default setting is 60 min..  
The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes, using the number keys.  
Auto Off may not work when error messages appear.  
❖ Energy Saver Timer  
Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching to lower-power  
mode after copying has finished or the last operation is performed.  
The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes, using the number keys.  
The default setting is 15 min..  
❖ Panel Off Timer  
Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching the panel off after  
copying has finished or the last operation is performed.  
The warm up time for making a copy from standby mode is 3 seconds for  
Panel off Level 1 and 15 seconds for Panel off Level 2.  
Enter a time interval between 10 seconds and 240 minutes, using the number  
keys.  
The default setting is 60 second(s).  
❖ System Auto Reset Timer  
The System Reset setting automatically switches the screen to that of the func-  
tion set in Function Priority when no operations are in progress, or when an  
interrupted job is cleared. This setting determines the system reset interval.  
• On  
• Off  
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys  
The default setting is 60 second(s).  
❖ Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer (copier/Document Server)  
Specifies the time to elapse before copier and Document Server modes reset.  
• On  
• Off  
If [Off] is selected, the machine does not automatically switch to the user code  
entry screen.  
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.  
The default setting is 60 second(s).  
57  
   
System Settings  
❖ Facsimile Auto Reset Timer (facsimile)  
Specifies the time to elapse before the facsimile mode resets.  
The time can be set from 30 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.  
The default setting is 30 second(s).  
❖ Printer Auto Reset Timer (printer)  
Specifies the time to elapse before the printer function resets.  
• On  
2
• Off  
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.  
The default setting is 60 second(s).  
❖ Scanner Auto Reset Timer (scanner)  
Specifies the time to elapse before the scanner function resets.  
• On  
• Off  
If [Off] is selected, the machine will not automatically switch to the user code  
entry screen.  
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.  
The default setting is 60 second(s).  
❖ Set Date  
Set the date for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.  
To change between year, month, and day, press [ ← ] and [ → ].  
❖ Set Time  
Set the time for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.  
Enter the time using the 24–hour format (in 1 second increments).  
To change between hours, minutes and seconds, press [ ← ] and [ → ].  
❖ Auto Logout Timer  
Specify whether or not to automatically log out a user when the user does not  
operate the machine for a specified period of time after logging in.  
• On  
• Off  
The time can be set from 60 to 999 seconds, in one second increments, using  
the number keys.  
The default setting is 180 second(s).  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
58  
Interface Settings  
Interface Settings  
This section describes the user tools in the Interface Settings menu under System  
Settings.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
2
Network  
This section describes the user tools in the Network menu under Interface Set-  
tings.  
❖ Machine IPv4 Address  
Before using this machine in the network environment, you must specify the  
IPv4 address and subnet mask.  
When you select [Specify], enter the IPv4 address and subnet mask as  
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" ("x" indicates a number).  
If the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed, and you are using the IEEE 1394  
interface, you must specify a domain address that is different from the [IPv4  
Address] of [IEEE 1394]. If you to set the address for the same domain, set a dif-  
ferent value for the subnet mask.  
When you select [Specify], make sure that IPv4 address is different from that  
of other machines on the network.  
The physical address (MAC address) also appears.  
If you are using Ethernet and IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394) interfaces at the  
same time, settings must be made carefully.  
• Auto-Obtain (DHCP)  
• Specify  
• Machine IPv4 Address: 011.022.033.044  
• Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000  
❖ IPv4 Gateway Address  
A gateway is a connection or interchange point between two networks.  
Specify the gateway address for the router or host computer used as a gateway.  
• IPv4 Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000  
❖ Machine IPv6 Address  
Specify the machine’s IPv6 network address.  
• Link-local Address  
The machine’s specified link-local address appears.  
• Manual Configuration Address  
The machine’s manually configured address appears.  
• Stateless Address: 1-5  
The specified stateless address appears.  
59  
       
System Settings  
❖ IPv6 Gateway Address  
Displays the machine’s IPv6 gateway address.  
❖ IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration  
Specify IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration.  
• Active  
• Inactive  
2
❖ DNS Configuration  
Make settings for the DNS server.  
When you select [Specify], enter the DNS Server IPv4 address as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"("x"  
indicates a number).  
• Auto-Obtain (DHCP)  
• Specify  
• DNS Server 1: 000.000.000.000  
• DNS Server 2: 000.000.000.000  
• DNS Server 3: 000.000.000.000  
❖ DDNS Configuration  
Specify the DDNS settings.  
• Active  
• Inactive  
❖ Domain Name  
Specify the domain name.  
The default domain name is blank.  
• Auto-Obtain (DHCP)  
• Specify  
❖ WINS Configuration  
Specify the WINS server settings.  
If [On]is selected, enter the WINS Server IPv4 address as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"("x" in-  
dicates a number).  
If DHCP is in use, specify the scope ID.  
Enter a scope ID using up to 31 characters.  
• On  
• Primary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000  
• Secondary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000  
• Scope ID  
• Off  
60  
Interface Settings  
❖ Effective Protocol  
Select the protocol to use in the network.  
• IPv4: Active / Inactive  
• IPv6: Active / Inactive  
• NetWare: Active / Inactive  
• SMB: Active / Inactive  
• AppleTalk: Active / Inactive  
2
❖ NCP Delivery Protocol  
Select the protocol for NCP delivery.  
• IPX Priority  
• TCP / IP Priority  
• IPX Only  
• TCP / IP Only  
If you select "IPX Only" or "TCP / IP Only", you cannot switch the protocol  
even if you cannot connect with it. If "NetWare" in [Effective Protocol] is set to  
"Inactive", you can only use TCP/IP.  
❖ NW Frame Type  
Select the frame type when you use NetWare.  
• Auto Select  
• Ethernet II  
• Ethernet 802.2  
• Ethernet 802.3  
• Ethernet SNAP  
❖ SMB Computer Name  
Specify the SMB computer name.  
Enter the computer name using up to 15 characters.  
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.  
Do not set a computer name starting with RNP and rnp.  
Use uppercase letters for alphabets.  
❖ SMB Work Group  
Specify the SMB work group.  
Enter the computer name using up to 15 characters.  
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.  
Use uppercase letters for alphabet.  
61  
System Settings  
❖ Ethernet Speed  
Set the access speed for networks.  
Select a speed that matches your network environment. [Auto Select] should  
usually be selected.  
• Auto Select  
• 10Mbps Full Duplex  
• 10Mbps Half Duplex  
• 100Mbps Full Duplex  
• 10Mbps Half Duplex  
2
❖ LAN Type  
When you have installed the IEEE 802.11b interface unit, select the method of  
connection.  
• Ethernet  
• IEEE 802.11b  
[LAN Type] is displayed when wireless LAN board is installed. If Ethernet and  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected, the selected interface has  
priority.  
❖ Ping Command  
Check the network connection with ping command using given IPv4 address.  
If you fail to connect to the network, check the following, and then retry the  
ping command.  
• Make sure that "IPv4" in [Effective Protocol] is set to "Effective".  
• Check that the machine with assigned IPv4 address is connected to the net-  
work.  
• There is a possibility that the same IPv4 address is used for the specified  
equipment.  
❖ Permit SNMPv3 Communication  
Set the encrypted communication of SNMPv3.  
• Encryption Only  
• Encryption / Clear Text  
If you select to [Encryption Only], you need to set an encryption password for  
the machine.  
❖ Permit SSL/TLS Communication  
Set the encrypted communication of SSL/TLS.  
• Ciphertext Only  
• Ciphertext Priority  
• Ciphertext / Clear Text  
If you set to [Ciphertext Only], you need to install the SSL certificate for the ma-  
chine.  
62  
Interface Settings  
❖ Host Name  
Specify the host name.  
Enter the host name using up to 63 characters.  
❖ Machine Name  
Specify the machine name.  
Enter the machine name using up to 31 characters.  
2
Parallel Interface  
This section describes the user tools in the Parallel Interface menu under Inter-  
face Settings.  
[Parallel Interface] is displayed when this machine is installed with the IEEE 1284  
interface board.  
❖ Parallel Timing  
Sets the timing for the control signal of the parallel interface.  
• ACK Outside  
• ACK Inside  
• STB Down  
❖ Parallel Communication Speed  
Sets the communication speed for the parallel interface.  
• High Speed  
• Standard  
❖ Selection Signal Status  
Sets the level for the select signal of the parallel interface.  
• High  
• Low  
❖ Input Prime  
Sets whether to validate or invalidate the input prime signal upon reception.  
• Active  
• Inactive  
❖ Bidirectional Communication  
Sets the printer's response mode to a status acquisition request when using a  
parallel interface.  
• On  
• Off  
When set to [Off], the bidirectional communication function will be disabled,  
and the printer driver will not be installed under Windows Auto Detect func-  
tion.  
63  
   
System Settings  
❖ Signal Control  
Specifies how error during printing or sending facsimile from the computer  
is to be dealt with.  
• Job Acceptance Priority  
• Printer Priority  
IEEE 1394  
2
This section describes the user tools in the IEEE 1394 menu under Interface Set-  
tings.  
[IEEE 1394] is displayed when this machine is installed with the IEEE 1394 inter-  
face board.  
❖ IPv4 Address  
Before using this machine in the network environment, you must specify the  
IPv4 address and subnet mask.  
When you select [Specify], enter the IPv4 address and subnet mask as  
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" ("x" indicates a number).  
When you use the IEEE 1394 interface on a network, you cannot use the Eth-  
ernet interface in the same domain. To use both interfaces in the same do-  
main, set different values for the subnet mask.  
When you select [Specify], make sure that IPv4 address is different from that  
of other machines on the network.  
The physical address (MAC address) also appears.  
If you are using Ethernet and IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394) interfaces at the  
same time, settings must be made carefully.  
• Auto-Obtain (DHCP)  
• Specify  
• Machine IPv4 Address: 000.000.000.000  
• Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000  
❖ DDNS Configuration  
Specify the DDNS settings.  
• Active  
• Inactive  
❖ Host Name  
Specify the host name.  
Enter the host name using up to 63 characters.  
❖ Domain Name  
Make settings for the domain name.  
The default domain name is blank.  
• Auto-Obtain (DHCP)  
• Specify  
Enter the domain name using up to 63 characters.  
64  
   
Interface Settings  
❖ WINS Configuration  
Specify the WINS server settings.  
If [On] is selected, specify the WINS Server IPv4 address as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"  
("xxx" indicates a number).  
If DHCP is in use, specify the scope ID.  
Enter scope ID using up to 31 characters.  
• On  
• Primary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000  
2
• Secondary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000  
• Scope ID  
• Off  
❖ IPv4 over 1394  
When you use the IPv4 over 1394 function of the IEEE 1394 interface to con-  
nect the machine to the network, or printing from computer with the IPv4  
over 1394 driver, you must specify [Active] for [IPv4 over 1394].  
• Active  
• Inactive  
Printing with IPv4 over 1394 is possible under Windows Me/XP and Win-  
dows Server 2003.  
❖ SCSI print (SBP-2)  
When you print using the SCSI print client function supported by Windows  
2000/XP, or Windows Server 2003, you must set [SCSI print (SBP-2)].  
• Active  
• Inactive  
❖ Bidirectional SCSI print  
Specifies the printer's response mode etc. for status requests when using the  
IEEE 1394 interface.  
• On  
• Off  
If this is set to [Off] bidirectional communication will not work.  
65  
System Settings  
IEEE 802.11b  
This section describes the user tools in the IEEE 802.11b menu under Interface  
Settings.  
[IEEE 802.11b] is displayed when this machine is installed with the wireless LAN  
interface board.  
Be sure to make all settings simultaneously.  
2
❖ Communication Mode  
Specifies the communication mode of the wireless LAN.  
• 802.11 Ad-hoc Mode  
• Ad-hoc Mode  
• Infrastructure Mode  
❖ SSID Setting  
Specifies SSID to distinguish the access point in infrastructure mode or 802.11  
ad hoc mode.  
The characters that can be used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).  
If blank is specified in 802.11b ad hoc mode or ad hoc mode, "ASSID" appears.  
❖ Channel  
Specifies a channel when you select 802.11b ad hoc mode or ad hoc mode.  
The default setting is 11.  
The following channels are available:  
• Metric version: 1-14  
• Inch version: 1-11  
❖ Security Method  
Specifies the encryption of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).  
If you select [WEP], always enter WEP key. If you select [WPA], the encryption  
and authentication methods.  
Specify "WPA", when [Communication Mode] is set to [Infrastructure Mode].  
• Off  
• WEP  
• WPA  
• WPA Encryption Method  
Select either "TKIP" or "CCMP(AES)".  
• WPA Authent. Method  
Select either "WPA-PSK" or "WPA802.1X)". If you have selected "WPA-  
PSK", enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8- 63 characters in ASCII code.  
❖ Wireless LAN Signal  
When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave  
status using the control panel.  
Radio wave status is displayed when you press [Wireless LAN Signal].  
66  
   
Interface Settings  
❖ Transmission Speed  
Specifies the communication speed of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).  
• Auto Select  
• 11Mbps Fixed  
• 5.5Mbps Fixed  
• 2Mbps Fixed  
• 1Mbps Fixed  
2
❖ Restore Factory Defaults  
You can return the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) settings to their defaults.  
• No  
• Yes  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
Print List  
You can check items related to the network environment.  
The configuration page shows the current network settings and network infor-  
mation.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Interface Settings].  
67  
   
System Settings  
C Press [Print List].  
2
D Press the {Start} key.  
The configuration page is printed.  
E Press [Exit].  
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ You can also exit by pressing [Exit] on the User Tools main menu.  
68  
File Transfer  
File Transfer  
This section describes the user tools in the File Transfer menu under System Set-  
tings.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Delivery Option  
Enables or disables sending stored or scanned documents to the ScanRouter  
delivery server.  
2
• On  
• Main Delivery Server IPv4 Address  
• Sub Delivery Server IPv4 Address  
• Off  
Specify this option when selecting whether or not to use the ScanRouter delivery  
software. If you do, you will have to preregister I/O devices in the ScanRouter  
delivery software.  
❖ Capture Server IP Address  
Specify the capture server IPv4 address.  
This setting appears when the media link board is installed, and that the cap-  
ture function is being used by the ScanRouter delivery software.  
69  
   
System Settings  
❖ Fax RX File Transmission  
Specify how to deliver fax files received via the different lines.  
• Setting per Line  
• Line 1  
• Line 2  
• Line 3  
• E-mail  
2
• IP-Fax  
The lines appear according to the operating environment.  
• RX File Delivery  
Specifies whether or not received fax documents are sent to the ScanRouter  
delivery software for each fax line.  
• Deliver to Server  
• Do not Deliver  
• Print at Delivery  
Specify whether or not received fax documents sent to the ScanRouter de-  
livery software should also be printed at the same time.  
• Print  
• Do not Print  
• File to Deliver  
Specify whether all received fax documents or only received fax docu-  
ments that include delivery codes (ID or SUB/SEP codes) are sent to the  
ScanRouter delivery software.  
• File with Delivery Code  
• Print File  
• Delivery Failure File  
If a received fax document cannot be sent to the ScanRouter delivery soft-  
ware, it is stored in memory. To print a stored file, select [Print File], to de-  
lete, select [Delete File].  
If the machine can send the data to the ScanRouter delivery software, it  
does so automatically. If you delete the data, you will not be able to distrib-  
ute or print it.  
• Print File  
• Delete File  
❖ SMTP Server  
When using DNS, enter the host name.  
When not using DNS, enter the SMTP server IPv4 address.  
• Server Name  
• Port No.: 25  
Enter the server name using up to 127 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.  
Enter port number between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then  
press the {q} key.  
70  
File Transfer  
❖ SMTP Authentication  
Specify SMTP authentication (PLAIN, LOGIN, CRAMMD5, DIGEST-MD5).  
When sending e-mail to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server  
security level using authentication that requires entering the user name and  
password.  
If the SMTP server requires authentication, set [SMTP Authentication] to [On],  
and then specify the user name, password and encryption.  
Enter the user name and password to be set for the Administrator's e-mail ad-  
dress when using Internet Fax.  
2
• SMTP AUTH  
• On  
User Name  
Enter the user name using up to 191 characters. Spaces cannot be en-  
tered. Depending on the SMTP server type, "realm" must be specified.  
Add "@" after the user name, as in "user name@realm".  
E-mail Address  
Password  
Enter the password using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.  
Encryption: Auto / On / Off  
[Encryption]-[Auto]: Use If the authentication method is PLAIN, LOGIN,  
CRAM-MD5, or DIGEST-MD5.  
[Encryption]-[On]: Use If the authentication method is CRAMMD5 or DI-  
GEST-MD5.  
[Encryption]-[Off]: Use If the authentication method is PLAIN, or LOGIN.  
• Off  
❖ POP before SMTP  
Specify POP authentication (POP before SMTP).  
When sending e-mail to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server  
security level by connecting to the POP server for authentication.  
To enable POP server authentication before sending e-mail via the SMTP  
server, set [POP before SMTP] to [On]. E-mail is sent to the SMTP server after the  
time specified for [Wait Time after Authent.] has elapsed.  
If you select [On], enter [Server Name] in [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings]. Also, check the  
port number for [POP3] in [E-mail Communication Port].  
• On  
• Wait Time after Authent.: 300  
Specify [Wait Time after Authent.] from zero to 10,000 milliseconds, in in-  
crements of one millisecond.  
• User Name  
Enter the user name using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.  
• E-mail Address  
• Password  
Enter the password using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.  
• Off  
71  
System Settings  
❖ Reception Protocol  
Specify Reception Protocol for receiving Internet Fax.  
• POP3  
• IMAP4  
• SMTP  
❖ POP3 / IMAP4 Settings  
Specify the POP3/IMAP4 server name for receiving Internet faxes.  
The specified POP3/IMAP4 server name is used for [POP before SMTP].  
2
• Server Name  
If DNS is in use, enter the host name.  
If DNS is not in use, enter the POP3/IMAP4 or server IPv4 address.  
Enter POP3/IMAP4 server name using up to 127 characters. Spaces cannot  
be entered.  
• Encryption  
• Auto  
Password encryption is automatically set according to the POP/IMAP  
server settings.  
• On  
Encrypt password.  
• Off  
Do not encrypt password.  
❖ Administrator's E-mail Address  
On e-mailed scanned documents, if the sender is not specified this appears as  
the sender's address.  
When sending e-mail under the Internet fax function, administrator's e-mail  
address will appear as the sender’s address under the following conditions:  
• The sender has not been specified and the machine’s e-mail address has  
not been registered.  
• The specified sender is not registered in the machine’s address book and  
the machine’s e-mail address has not been registered.  
When conducting SMTP authentication for the transmitted files under the In-  
ternet fax function, the Administrator's E-mail Address will appear in the  
"From:" box. If you have specified the user name and e-mail address in [SMTP  
Authentication], make sure to specify this setting.  
Enter up to 128 characters.  
On e-mailed scanned documents, if [Auto Specify Sender Name] is [Off], specify  
the sender.  
72  
File Transfer  
❖ E-mail Communication Port  
Specify the port numbers for receiving Internet faxes. The specified POP3  
port number is used for [POP before SMTP].  
• POP3: 110  
• IMAP4: 143  
• SMTP: 25  
Enter a port number between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then  
press the {q} key.  
2
❖ E-mail Reception Interval  
Specify, in minutes, the time interval for receiving Internet faxes via POP3 or  
IMAP4 server.  
• On: 15 minute(s)  
• Off  
If [On] is selected, the time interval can be set from 2 to 1440 minutes in incre-  
ments of one minute.  
❖ Max. Reception E-mail Size  
Specify the maximum reception e-mail size for receiving Internet faxes.  
• 2MB  
Enter a size from one to 50 MB in increments of one megabyte.  
❖ E-mail Storage in Server  
Specify whether or not to store received Internet fax e-mails on the POP3 or  
IMAP4 server.  
• Off  
• All  
• Errors Only  
❖ Default User Name / Password (Send)  
Specify the user name and password required when sending scan files direct-  
ly to a shared folder on a computer running Windows, to an FTP server, or to  
a NetWare server.  
• SMB User Name  
• SMB Password  
• FTP User Name  
• FTP Password  
• NCP User Name  
• NCP Password  
Enter in up to 64 characters.  
73  
System Settings  
❖ Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message  
You can program, change, or delete the e-mail message used when sending  
an Internet fax or scan file as an attachment.  
• Program / Change  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [File Transfer].  
C Press [TNext].  
2
D Press [Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message].  
E Press [Program / Change].  
F Press [Not Programmed].  
G Press [Change].  
H Enter a name, and then press [OK].  
Enter the name using up to 20 characters.  
I Press [Edit].  
To start a new line, press [OK] to return to the e-mail message screen,  
and then press [TNext] in "Select Line to Edit:".  
J Enter the text, and then press [OK].  
Enter up to five lines of text. Each line can consist of up to 80 characters.  
K Press [OK].  
L Press [Exit].  
• Delete  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [File Transfer].  
C Press [TNext].  
D Press [Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message].  
E Press [Delete].  
F Select the e-mail message to delete.  
The confirmation message about deleting appears.  
G Press [Yes].  
74  
File Transfer  
❖ Auto Specify Sender Name  
Set whether or not to specify the name of the sender when sending e-mail.  
• On  
If you select [On], the specified e-mail address will appear in the "From:"  
box. If you do not specify the sender’s address, the administrator’s e-mail  
address will appear in the "From:" box.  
If you do not specify the sender when sending a file by e-mail under the  
fax function, or if the specified e-mail address is not registered in the ma-  
chine’s address book, the machine’s e-mail address will appear in the  
"From:" box. If the machine does not have an e-mail address, the adminis-  
trator’s e-mail address will appear in the "From:" box.  
2
• Off  
If you select [Off], the specified e-mail address will appear in the "From:"  
box, but you cannot send e-mail without specifying the sender’s e-mail ad-  
dress. Under the fax function, you cannot send e-mail if the specified send-  
er’s e-mail address is not registered in the machine’s address book.  
❖ Fax E-mail Account  
Specify e-mail address, user name and password for receiving Internet faxes.  
• Receive  
• E-mail Address  
Enter an e-mail address using up to 128 characters.  
• User Name  
Enter a user name using up to 64 characters.  
• Password  
Enter a password using up to 64 characters.  
• Do not Receive  
❖ Scanner Resend Interval Time  
Specifies the interval the machine waits before resending a scan file, if it can-  
not be sent to the delivery server or mail server.  
The default setting is 300 second(s).  
The interval time can be set from 60 to 999 seconds in one second increments,  
using the number keys.  
This setting is for the scanner function.  
❖ Number of Scanner Resends  
Sets a maximum number of times a scan file is resent to the delivery server or  
mail server.  
• On: 3 time(s)  
• Off  
If [On] is selected, the number of times can be set from 1 to 99. This setting is  
for the scanner function.  
This setting is for the scanner function.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
75  
System Settings  
Administrator Tools  
This section describes the user tools in the Administrator Tools menu under Sys-  
tem Settings.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
Administrator Tools are used by the administrator. To change these settings,  
contact the administrator.  
2
We recommend specifying Administrator Authentication before making Ad-  
ministrator Tools settings.  
❖ Address Book Management  
You can add, change or delete information registered in the Address Book.  
For details, see "Address Book".  
• Program / Change  
You can register and change names as well as user codes.  
• Names  
You can register a name, key display, registration number, and title se-  
lection.  
• Auth. Info  
You can register a user code, and specify the functions available to each  
user code. You can also register user names and passwords to be used  
when sending e-mail, sending files to folders, or accessing an LDAP  
server.  
• Protection  
You can register a protection code.  
• Fax Dest.  
You can register a fax number, international TX mode, fax header, label  
insertion, IP-Fax destination, and protocol.  
• E-mail  
You can register an e-mail address.  
• Folder  
You can register the protocol, path, port number, and server name.  
• Add to Group  
You can put names registered in the Address Book into a group.  
• Delete  
You can delete a name from the Address Book.  
You can register up to 2,000 names.  
You can register up to 500 user codes.  
You can also register and manage names in the Address Book using Web Im-  
age Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.  
76  
   
Administrator Tools  
❖ Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group  
Names registered in the Address Book can be added into a group.  
You can then easily manage the names registered in each group.  
• Program / Change  
You can register and change groups.  
• Names  
You can register a name, key display, registration number, and title se-  
lection.  
2
• Programmed User/Group  
You can check the names or groups registered in each group.  
• Protection  
You can register a protection code.  
• Add to Group  
You can put groups registered in the Address Book into a group.  
• Delete  
You can delete a group from the Address Book.  
You can register up to 100 groups.  
You can also register and manage groups in the Address Book using Web Im-  
age Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.  
Use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin provided with the printer scanner unit.  
❖ Address Book: Change Order  
Changes the order of registered names.  
You can rearrange the order of items on the same page, but you cannot move  
items to another page.  
For example, you cannot move an item from "PLANNING" ([OPQ]) to "DAI-  
LY" ([CD]).  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book: Change Order].  
77  
System Settings  
D Press the name key to be moved.  
2
You can select a name using the number keys.  
E Press the name key in the place you want to move it to.  
The user key is moved to the selected position, and the user key currently  
at the selected position is moved forward or backward.  
If you move the selected user key forward, the user key currently at the se-  
lected position is moved backward.  
If you move the selected user key backward, the user key currently at the  
selected position is moved forward.  
You can also select a name using the number keys.  
78  
Administrator Tools  
❖ Print Address Book: Destination List  
You can print the destination list registered in the Address Book.  
• Print in Title 1 Order  
Prints the Address Book in Title 1 order.  
• Print in Title 2 Order  
Prints the Address Book in Title 2 order.  
• Print in Title 3 Order  
2
Prints the Address Book in Title 3 order.  
• Print Group Dial List  
Prints the group Address Book.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Print Address Book: Destination List].  
D Select the print format.  
E To print the list on two-sided pages, select [Print on 2 Sides].  
F Press the {Start} key.  
The list prints out.  
❖ Address Book: Edit Title  
You can edit the title to easily find a user.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book: Edit Title].  
D Press the title key you want to change.  
79  
System Settings  
E Enter the new name, and then press [OK].  
F Press [OK].  
❖ Address Book: Switch Title  
Specifies the title to select a name.  
• Title 1  
• Title 2  
• Title 3  
2
❖ Back Up / Restore Address Book  
You can back up the machine’s address book to external storage or restore the  
backup copy from the external storage.  
• Back Up  
You can back up the machine’s address book to external storage.  
• Restore  
You can restore the backup copy of the address book from external storage.  
• Format  
You can format the external storage.  
• Obtain Media Info  
The free space and occupied space of the external storage are displayed.  
❖ Display / Print Counter  
Allows you to view and print the number of prints.  
• Display / Print Counter  
Displays the number of prints for each function (Total, Copier, Printer, A3 /  
DLT, Duplex, Fax Prints, Send / TX Total, Fax Transmission, Scanner Send).  
• Print Counter List  
Prints out a list of the number of prints made under each function.  
❖ Display / Clear / Print Counter per User  
Allows you to view and print the numbers of prints accessed with user codes,  
and to set those values to 0.  
Press [UPrevious] and [TNext] to show all the numbers of prints.  
The number of prints may differ from the counter values shown in Display /  
Print Counter.  
• Print Counter List for All Users  
Prints the counter value for all the users.  
• Clear Counter List for All Users  
Resets the counter value for all the users.  
• Print Counter List per User  
Prints the counter value for each user.  
• Clear Counter List per User  
Resets the counter value for each user.  
• Select All on the Page  
Select the all users on the page.  
80  
Administrator Tools  
❖ User Authentication Management  
• User Code Auth.  
Using User Code Authentication, you can limit the available functions and  
supervise their use.  
When using User Code Authentication, register the user code.  
Using the Printer PC Control function, you can obtain a log of prints cor-  
responding to the codes entered using the printer driver.  
If User Code Authentication has been specified, Auto Color Select cannot be  
used.  
2
For details about Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP  
Authentication, and Integration Server Authentication, consult your ad-  
ministrator.  
• Copier: Restrict All, Single Color / Full Color, Full Color, Do not Restrict  
• Printer: Black & White, PC Control, Do not Restrict  
• Other Functions: Document Server, Facsimile, Scanner  
• Printer Job Authentication: Entire, Simple (Limitation), Simple (All)  
• Basic Auth.  
• Windows Auth.  
• LDAP Auth.  
• Integration Svr. Auth.  
• Off  
❖ Enhanced Authentication Management  
For details about this function, consult your administrator.  
❖ Administrator Authentication Management  
For details about this function, consult your administrator.  
❖ Program / Change Administrator  
For details about this function, consult your administrator.  
❖ Key Counter Management  
Specify the functions you want to manage with the key counter.  
• Copier: Full Color / Single Color  
• Printer: Single Color  
• Other Functions: Document Server / Facsimile / Scanner  
❖ Extended Security  
Specify whether or not to use the extended security functions. For details  
about the extended security functions, consult your administrator.  
81  
 
System Settings  
❖ Auto Delete File in Document Server  
Specify whether documents stored in the Document Server will or will not be  
deleted after a specified period of time.  
• On: 3 day(s)  
• Off  
If you select [On], documents stored subsequently are deleted after the speci-  
fied period.  
If you select [Off], documents are not automatically deleted.  
If you select [On], enter a number of days from 1 to 180 (in 1 day increments).  
The default is 3 days, this means documents are deleted 3 days (72 hours) af-  
ter they are stored.  
2
❖ Delete All Files in Document Server  
You can delete files stored in the Document Server, including files stored for Sam-  
ple Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print under the printer function.  
• No  
• Yes  
Even if a password is always set, all documents are deleted.  
A confirmation message appears. To delete all documents, select [Yes].  
❖ Program / Change/Delete LDAP Server  
Program the LDAP server to find up e-mail destinations in the LDAP server  
Address Book directly. This function is possible when sending scan files by e-  
mail using the scanner or fax function.  
• Name  
• Server Name  
• Search Base  
• Port Number  
• Use Secure Connection (SSL)  
• Authentication  
• User Name  
• Password  
• Search Conditions  
• Search Options  
To start an LDAP search, make sure that the items listed below are set. For  
other items, check your environment and make any necessary changes.  
• Server Name  
• Search Base  
• Port Number  
• Search Conditions  
• Authentication  
To use the LDAP server in Administrator Tools, select [On] under LDAP server.  
This function supports LDAP Version 2.0 and 3.0. Ver 2.0 does not support  
High Security authentication.  
82  
Administrator Tools  
❖ LDAP Search  
Specify whether or not to use the LDAP server for searching.  
• On  
• Off  
If you select [Off], LDAP server list will not appear on the searching dis-  
play.  
❖ AOF (Always On)  
Specify whether or not to use Auto Off.  
2
• On  
• Off  
❖ Firmware Version  
You can check the version of the software installed in this machine.  
❖ Network Security Level  
For details about this function, consult your administrator.  
❖ Auto Erase Memory Setting  
For details about this function, consult your administrator.  
❖ Erase All Memory  
For details about this function, consult your administrator.  
❖ Delete All Logs  
For details about this function, consult your administrator.  
❖ Transfer Log Setting  
For details about this function, consult your administrator.  
❖ Data Security for Copying  
For details about this function, consult your administrator.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
p.205 “Address Book”  
p.219 “Printing the Counter for Each User”  
p.279 “Counter”  
83  
System Settings  
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server  
This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.  
To program / change the LDAP server  
A Press [System Settings].  
2
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the LDAP server you want to program or change.  
When programming the server, select [Not Programmed].  
F Set each item as necessary.  
G Press [OK] after setting each item.  
For details about LDAP server, see "Programming the LDAP server".  
H Press [Exit].  
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Reference  
p.85 “Programming the LDAP server”  
To delete the programmed LDAP server  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server].  
D Press [Delete].  
E Select the LDAP server you want to delete.  
F Press [Yes].  
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
84  
   
Administrator Tools  
Programming the LDAP server  
This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.  
To enter an identification name  
A Press [Change] under "Name".  
2
Register a name for the LDAP server that will appear on the server selection  
screen of the LDAP search operation.  
B Enter the server’s identification name.  
C Press [OK].  
To enter a server name  
A Press [Change] under "Server Name".  
Register the LDAP server’s host name or IPv4 address.  
B Enter the LDAP server name.  
C Press [OK].  
To enter the search base  
A Press [Change] under "Search Base".  
Select a route folder to start the search from e-mail addresses registered in the  
selected folder are search targets.  
B Enter the search base.  
For example, if the search target is the sales department of ABC company, en-  
ter "dc=sales department, o=ABC". (In this example, the description is for an  
active directory. "dc" is for the organization unit, and "o" is for the company.)  
Search base registration may be required depending on your server environ-  
ment. When registration is required, unspecified searches will result in error.  
Check your server environment and enter any required specifications.  
C Press [OK].  
85  
           
System Settings  
To enter a port number  
A Press [Change] under "Port No.".  
Specify the port number for communicating with the LDAP server. Specify a  
port that is compliant with your environment.  
B Enter the port number using the number keys, and then press the {#} key.  
2
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to "636".  
To start SSL communication  
A Press [On] under "Use Secure Connection (SSL).  
Use SSL to communicate with the LDAP server.  
To use SSL, the LDAP server must support SSL.  
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to "689".  
SSL setting must be enabled on this machine. For details, consult your net-  
work administrator.  
To set authentication  
A Press [TNext].  
B Press [On] or [High Security] under "Authentication".  
To make a search request to the LDAP server, use the administrator account  
for authentication.  
Authentication settings must comply with your server’s authentication set-  
tings. Check your server settings before setting this machine.  
[High Security] is available only with LDAP Version 3.0.  
When [High Security] is selected, the administrator password is encrypted be-  
fore it is sent to the network. When [On] is selected, the password is sent with-  
out encryption.  
86  
     
Administrator Tools  
To enter the user name and password  
A Press [TNext].  
B Press [Change] under "User Name".  
When [On] or [High Security] is selected for the authentication setting, use the  
administrator account name and password. Do not enter the administrator  
account name and password when using authentication for each individual  
or each search.  
2
C Enter the user name, and then press [OK].  
Procedures for the user name setting differ depending on server environ-  
ment. Check your server environment before making the setting.  
Example: Domain Name\User Name, User Name@Domain Name,  
CN=Name, OU=Department Name, DC=Server Name  
D Press [Change] under "Password".  
E Enter the password, and then press [OK].  
The user name and password are required for administrator authentication to  
access the LDAP server.  
You can set the user name and password in this machine’s Address Book to  
allow individual authentication access to the LDAP server. Use Administra-  
tor Tools to select the user name and password you want to use.  
To test the connection  
A Press [Connection Test].  
Access the LDAP server to check the proper connection is established. Check  
authentication works according to the authentication settings.  
A connection test is carried out.  
B Press [Exit].  
If the connection test fails, check your settings and try again.  
This function does not check search conditions or the search base.  
87  
   
System Settings  
To set search conditions  
A Press [TNext] twice.  
B Press [Change] for items you want to use as search conditions from the fol-  
lowing: [Name], [E-mail Address], [Fax Number], [Company Name], and [Depart-  
ment Name].  
2
You can enter an attribute as a typical search keyword. Using the entered at-  
tribute, the function searches the LDAP server’s Address Book.  
C Enter the attribute you want to use when searching for e-mail addresses,  
and then press [OK].  
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check  
the attribute value complies with your server environment before setting it.  
You can leave items blank, but you cannot leave attributes blank when  
searching for e-mail addresses from the LDAP server Address Book.  
To set search options  
A Press [TNext] three times.  
B Press [Change] under "Attribute".  
C Enter the attribute you want to use when searching for e-mail addresses,  
and then press [OK].  
To search the LDAP server data using a keyword other than prepared key-  
words such as Name, E-mail Address, FAX Number, Company Name, and  
Department Name, specify the attribute for the keyword registered in your  
LDAP server, and the name to be displayed on the control panel during the  
search. For example, to search e-mail addresses by employee number, enter  
"employeeNo." in the Attribute field, and "Employee No." in the key display  
field.  
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check  
the attribute complies with your server environment before setting it.  
D Press [Change] under "Key Display".  
88  
   
Administrator Tools  
E Enter the key display, and then press [OK].  
The registered "key display" appears as a keyword for searching LDAP.  
• Without key display registration  
2
• With key display registration  
The key does not appear on the search screen unless both "Attribute" and  
"Key Display" are registered. Make sure you register both to use the optional  
search.  
89  
System Settings  
2
90  
3. Copier / Document Server  
Features  
This chapter describes user tools in the Copier / Document Server Features menu.  
For details on how to access Copier / Document Server Features, see "Accessing  
User Tools (System Settings)".  
General Features  
This section describes the user tools in the General Features menu under Copier /  
Document Server Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Auto Image Density Priority  
You can set whether Auto Image Density is "On" or "Off" when the machine  
is turned on, reset, or modes are cleared.  
• Full Color  
• On  
• Off  
• B&W / Single Color  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Original Type Priority  
You can select the original type effective when the power is turned on, or modes  
cleared.  
• Full Color  
• Text  
• Text / Photo  
• Photo  
• Pale  
• Generation Copy  
• Map  
• B&W / Single Color  
• Text  
• Text / Photo  
• Photo  
• Pale  
• Generation Copy  
• Map  
91  
       
Copier / Document Server Features  
❖ Original Photo Type Priority  
When you select "Text / Photo" or "Photo" in "Original Type Priority", you  
can change the settings of the selected original type.  
• Glossy Photo  
• Printed Photo  
• Copied Photo  
❖ Original Type Display  
You can have the original types shown on the initial display.  
• Hide  
3
• Display  
If you select [Hide], the display is as below.  
❖ Paper Display  
You can choose to have the available paper trays and sizes shown on the ini-  
tial display.  
• Hide  
• Display  
If you select [Hide], the display is shown as below. Press [Auto Paper Select] to  
display paper sizes.  
❖ Original Orientation in Duplex Mode  
You can set the original orientation when making two-sided copies.  
• Top to Top  
• Top to Bottom  
92  
General Features  
❖ Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode  
You can set the copy orientation when making two-sided copies.  
• Top to Top  
• Top to Bottom  
❖ Max. Copy Quantity  
The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999.  
The default setting is 999 sheets.  
❖ Auto Tray Switching  
If you load paper of the same size in two or more trays, the machine automat-  
ically shifts to the other when the first tray runs out of paper (when Auto Pa-  
per Select is selected.) This function is called "Auto Tray Switching". This  
setting specifies whether to use Auto Tray Switching or not.  
3
• With Image Rotation  
Use to copy when using the Auto Tray Switching function.  
• Without Image Rotation  
Only copies with Auto Tray Switching if you load paper of the same size  
and in the same orientation in two or more trays. If the paper is not the  
same size or in the same orientation, copying is interrupted and the mes-  
sage "Load paper." is displayed.  
• Off  
When a paper tray runs out of paper, copying is interrupted and the mes-  
sage "Load paper." is displayed.  
❖ Tone: Original Remains  
The beeper (key tone) sounds if you forget to remove originals after copying.  
• On  
• Off  
If Panel Tone of User Tools (System Settings) is [Off] the beeper does not  
sound irrespective of the Tone: Original Remains setting.  
❖ Job End Call  
You can choose whether or not the beeper sounds when copying is complete.  
If Panel Tone of User Tools (System Settings) settings is [On], the machine  
beeps to notify you that it did not complete a job for reasons such as copying  
was interrupted, the paper tray ran out of paper, or a paper jam occurred.  
• On  
• Off  
93  
Copier / Document Server Features  
❖ Customize Function: Copier  
You can assign up to six frequently-used functions to Copy Function keys.  
3
• Off  
• 2 originals → 2 Sided: Top to Top  
• 2 originals → 2 Sided: Top to Bottom  
• 2 Sided → 2 Sided  
• 2 Sided → 2 Sheets  
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals  
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 4 originals  
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 8 originals  
• 4 originals → 2 Sided Combine: Top to Top  
• 4 originals → 2 Sided Combine: Top to Bottom  
• 1 Sided → Magazine  
• 2 Sided → Magazine  
• Create Margin  
• Original Orientation  
• Batch  
• Staple: Top Slant/Left  
• Staple: Bottom Slant/Left  
• Staple: Left 2  
• Staple: Top 2  
• Staple: Top  
• Staple: Bottom  
• Saddle Stitch  
• 2 Holes Left  
• 2 Holes Top  
• 3 Holes Left  
• 3 Holes Top  
• 4 Holes Left  
• 4 Holes Top  
94  
General Features  
• Rotate Sort  
• Positive/Negative  
❖ Customize Function: Document Server Storage  
You can assign up to six frequently-used functions to Document Server Stor-  
age keys.  
3
• Off  
• 2 Sided original: Top to Top  
• 2 Sided original: Top to Bottom  
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals  
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 4 originals  
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 8 originals  
• 2 Sided: Top to Top → 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals  
• 2 Sided: Top to Bottom → 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals  
• 2 Sided: Top to Top → 1 Sided Combine: 4 originals  
• 2 Sided: Top to Bottom → 1 Sided Combine: 4 originals  
• 2 Sided: Top to Top → 1 Sided Combine: 8 originals  
• 2 Sided: Top to Bottom → 1 Sided Combine: 8 originals  
• Create Margin  
• Original Orientation  
• Batch  
• Positive/Negative  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
p.47 “Panel key Sound”  
"Selecting the Original Type Setting", Copy/ Document Server Reference  
"Adjusting Copy Image Density", Copy/ Document Server Reference  
"Selecting Copy Paper", Copy/ Document Server Reference  
95  
Copier / Document Server Features  
Reproduction Ratio  
This section describes the user tools in the Reproduction Ratio menu under  
Copier / Document Server Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Shortcut R/E  
You can register up to three frequently used Reduce / Enlarge ratios other  
than the fixed Reduce / Enlarge ratio and have them shown on the initial dis-  
play. You can also change registered Reduce/ Enlarge ratios.  
3
• Metric version  
• 25%  
• A3 → A5, 8"×13" → A5 (50%)  
• A3 → 8"×13" (65%)  
• A3 → A4, A4 → A5 (71%)  
• B4JIS → 8"×13" (75%)  
• 8"×13" → A4, B4JIS → 8"×13" (82%)  
• 93%  
• B4JIS → A3 (115%)  
• 8"×13" → A3, A4 → B4JIS (122%)  
• A4 → A3, A5 → A4 (141%)  
• A5 → A3 (200%)  
• 400%  
• User R / E Ratio (25-400%)  
• Off  
Default:  
• F1: 71%  
• F2: 141%  
• F3: 93%  
• Inch version  
• 25%  
• 11"×17" → 51/2"×81/2" (50%)  
• 11"×17" → 81/2"×11" (65%)  
• 11"×15" → 81/2"×11" (73%)  
• 81/2"×14" → 81/2"×11" (78%)  
• 81/2"×13" → 81/2"×11" (85%)  
• 93%  
• 81/2"×14" → 11"×17" (121%)  
• 81/2"×11" → 11"×17" (129%)  
96  
   
Reproduction Ratio  
• 51/2"×81/2" → 81/2"×14" (155%)  
• 51/2"×81/2" → 11"×17" (200%)  
• 400%  
• User R / E Ratio (25-400%)  
• Off  
Default:  
• F1: 73%  
• F2: 155%  
• F3: 93%  
3
❖ R / E Ratio  
Specify the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear if [Reduce / Enlarge]  
is pressed on the copier screen.  
• Metric version  
• 25%  
• A3 → A5, 8"×13" → A5 (50%)  
• A3 → 8"×13" (65%)  
• A3 → A4, A4 → A5 (71%)  
• B4JIS → 8"×13" (75%)  
• 8"×13" → A4, B4JIS → 8"×13" (82%)  
• 93%  
• B4JIS → A3 (115%)  
• 8"×13" → A3, A4 → B4JIS (122%)  
• A4 → A3, A5 → A4 (141%)  
• A5 → A3 (200%)  
• 400%  
• User R / E Ratio (25-400%)  
• Inch version  
• 25%  
• 11"×17" → 51/2"×81/2" (50%)  
• 11"×17" → 81/2"×11" (65%)  
97  
Copier / Document Server Features  
• 11"×15" → 81/2"×11" (73%)  
• 81/2"×14" → 81/2"×11" (78%)  
• 81/2"×13" → 81/2"×11" (85%)  
• 93%  
• 81/2"×14" → 11"×17" (121%)  
• 81/2"×11" → 11"×17" (129%)  
• 51/2"×81/2" → 81/2"×14" (155%)  
• 51/2"×81/2" → 11"×17" (200%)  
• 400%  
3
• User R / E Ratio (25-400%)  
❖ R/E Ratio Priority  
You can set the ratio that has priority when [Reduce / Enlarge] is pressed.  
• Metric version  
• 400%  
• A5 → A3 (200%)  
• A4 → A3, A5 → A4 (141%)  
• 8"×13" → A3, A4 → B4JIS (122%)  
• B4JIS → A3 (115%)  
• 93%  
• 8"×13" → A4, B4JIS → 8"×13" (82%)  
• B4JIS → 8"×13" (75%)  
• A3 → A4, A4 → A5 (71%)  
• A3 → 8"×13" (65%)  
• A3 → A5, 8"×13" → A5 (50%)  
• 25%  
• Inch version  
• 400%  
• 51/2"×81/2" → 11"×17" (200%)  
• 51/2"×81/2" → 81/2"×14" (155%)  
• 81/2"×11" → 11"×17" (129%)  
• 81/2"×14" → 11"×17" (121%)  
• 93%  
• 81/2"×13" → 81/2"×11" (85%)  
• 81/2"×14" → 81/2"×11" (78%)  
• 11"×15" → 81/2"×11" (73%)  
• 11"×17" → 81/2"×11" (65%)  
• 11"×17" → 51/2"×81/2" (50%)  
• 25%  
98  
Reproduction Ratio  
❖ Ratio for Create Margin  
You can set a Reduce / Enlarge ratio when registering Create Margin in a short-  
cut key.  
Enter a ratio using number keys (in the range of 90 to 99%).  
The default setting is 93%.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
3
99  
Copier / Document Server Features  
Edit  
This section describes the user tools in the Edit menu under Copier / Document  
Server Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
Enter the width of the binding margin with the number keys as follows:  
• Metric version: 0–30 mm (in increments of 1 mm)  
• Inch version: 0"-1.2" (in increments of 0.1 inch)  
Enter the width of the erased margin with the number keys as follows:  
• Metric version: 2–99 mm (in increments of 1 mm)  
• Inch version: 0.1"-3.9" (in increments of 0.1 inch)  
3
An image of approximately 1.5 mm (0.06") will not be displayed as the width of  
the separation line, when specifying solid or broken lines.  
❖ Front Margin: Left / Right  
Specify left and right margins on the front side of copies in Margin Adjust-  
ment mode.  
• Left  
• Right  
Default:  
• Metric version: Left 5 mm  
• Inch version: Left 0.2"  
❖ Back Margin: Left / Right  
Specify left and right margins on the back side of copies in Margin Adjust-  
ment mode.  
• Left  
• Right  
Default:  
• Metric version: Right 5 mm  
• Inch version: Right 0.2"  
❖ Front Margin: Top / Bottom  
Specify top and bottom margins on the front side of copies in Margin Adjust-  
ment mode.  
• Top  
• Bttm.  
Default:  
• Metric version: T / B: 0mm  
• Inch version: T / B: 0.0"  
100  
   
Edit  
❖ Back Margin: Top/Bottom  
Specify top and bottom margins on the back side of copies in Margin Adjust-  
ment mode.  
• Top  
• Bottom  
Default:  
• Metric version: T / B: 0mm  
• Inch version: T / B: 0.0"  
❖ 1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT  
In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back side.  
The margin is set to the same value of "Back Margin: Left/Right".  
3
• Left  
• Right  
Default:  
• Metric version: Right 5 mm  
• Inch version: Right 0.2"  
❖ 1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoB  
In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back side.  
The value set for "Back Margin: Top/Bottom" is used.  
• Top  
• Bottom  
Default:  
• Metric version: T / B: 0mm  
• Inch version: T / B: 0.0"  
❖ Erase Border Width  
Top/Bottom 0mm  
Default:  
• Metric version: 10mm  
• Inch version: 0.4"  
❖ Erase Original Shadow in Combine  
In Combine mode, you can specify whether to erase a 3 mm, 0.1" boundary  
margin around all four edges of each original.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Erase Center Width  
Specify the width of the erased center margins with this function.  
Default:  
• Metric version: 10 mm  
• Inch version: 0.4"  
101  
Copier / Document Server Features  
❖ Front Cover Copy in Combine  
You can make a combined copy on the front cover sheet when you select  
Front Cover mode.  
GCST019E  
• Combine  
• Do not Combine  
3
❖ Copy Order in Combine  
You can set the copy order in Combine mode to Left to Right or Top to Bottom.  
GCAH090E  
• From Left to Right  
• From Top to Bottom  
❖ Orientation: Booklet, Magazine  
Select the opening orientation of copies made using Booklet or Magazine  
mode.  
• Open to Left  
• Open to Right  
❖ Copy on Designating Page in Combine  
Specify whether to make a combined copy on the inserted slip sheets in  
Desig./Chapter mode.  
• Combine  
• Do not Combine  
102  
Edit  
❖ Image Repeat Separation Line  
You can select a separation line and color using the Image Repeat function  
from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.  
• None  
• Solid  
3
• Broken A  
• Broken B  
• Crop Marks  
Line color (Full Color):  
• Yellow  
• Red  
• Cyan  
• Magenta  
• Green  
• Blue  
• Black  
Separation lines cannot be specified when using [None].  
In "Black and White", printing will be done in black.  
Selecting solid or broken lines might produce a blank area of approximately  
1.5 mm (0.06") in width along the separation line.  
103  
Copier / Document Server Features  
❖ Double Copies Separation Line  
You can select a separation line using the Double Copies function from: None,  
Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.  
• None  
• Solid  
3
• Broken A  
• Broken B  
• Crop Marks  
Line color (Full Color):  
• Yellow  
• Red  
• Cyan  
• Magenta  
• Green  
• Blue  
• Black  
Separation lines cannot be specified when using [None].  
In "Black and White", printing will be done in black.  
Selecting solid or broken lines might produce a blank area of approximately  
1.5 mm (0.06") in width along the separation line.  
104  
Edit  
❖ Separation Line in Combine  
You can select a separation line using the Combine function from: None, Sol-  
id, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.  
• None  
• Solid  
3
• Broken A  
• Broken B  
• Crop Marks  
Line color (Full Color):  
• Yellow  
• Red  
• Cyan  
• Magenta  
• Green  
• Blue  
• Black  
Separation lines cannot be specified when using [None].  
In "Black and White", printing will be done in black.  
Selecting solid or broken lines might produce a blank area of approximately  
1.5 mm (0.06") in width along the separation line.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
"Booklet/Magazine", Copy/ Document Server Reference  
105  
Copier / Document Server Features  
Stamp  
This section describes the user tools in the Stamp menu under Copier / Document  
Server Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
Background Numbering  
This section describes the user tools in the Background Numbering menu under  
Stamp.  
3
❖ Size  
You can set the size of the numbers.  
• Small  
• Normal  
• Large  
❖ Density  
You can set the density of the numbers.  
• Light  
• Normal  
• Dark  
• Very Dark  
❖ Stamp Color  
You can set the color of the numbers.  
• Yellow  
• Red  
• Cyan  
• Magenta  
• Green  
• Blue  
• Black  
106  
       
Stamp  
Preset Stamp  
This section describes the user tools in the Preset Stamp menu under Stamp.  
❖ Stamp Language  
You can select the language of the message printed in Stamp mode.  
• English  
• German  
• French  
• Italian  
3
• Spanish  
• Dutch  
• Portuguese  
• Polish  
• Czech  
• Swedish  
• Finnish  
• Hungarian  
• Norwegian  
• Danish  
• Russian  
• Japanese  
• Simplified Chinese  
• Traditional Chinese  
• Hangul  
❖ Stamp Priority  
You can select the stamp type given priority when [Preset Stamp] is pressed.  
• COPY  
• URGENT  
• PRIORITY  
• For Your Info.  
• PRELIMINARY  
• For Internal Use Only  
• CONFIDENTIAL  
• DRAFT  
107  
   
Copier / Document Server Features  
❖ Stamp Format  
Specify how each of stamp is printed.  
• Stamp Position  
Specify where to print the stamp.  
• Top Left  
• Top Center  
• Top Right  
• Center Left  
• Center  
3
• Center Right  
• Bottom Left  
• Bottom Center  
• Bottom Right  
• Stamp Position  
You can adjust the position of the stamp within the available ranges shown  
below.  
• Metric version:  
"Top Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Top Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm  
"Top Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Center Left"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Center"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm  
"Center Right"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm  
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
• Inch version:  
"Top Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Top Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"  
"Top Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Center Left"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Center"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"  
"Center Right"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"  
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
• Size  
You can set the size of the stamp.  
• 1X  
• 2X  
108  
Stamp  
• Density  
You can set the pattern used to print the stamp.  
• Normal  
The stamp is printed on the image. You cannot check which parts will  
overlap.  
• Lighter  
The image can be seen through the stamp.  
• Lightest  
The image appears even clearer than in the Lighter setting.  
• Page to Stamp  
You can have the stamp printed on the first page or all pages.  
3
• All Pages  
• 1st Page Only  
❖ Stamp Color  
Sets the stamp print color.  
• Yellow  
• Red  
• Cyan  
• Magenta  
• Green  
• Blue  
• Black  
Reference  
"Preset Stamp", Copy/ Document Server Reference  
109  
Copier / Document Server Features  
User Stamp  
This section describes the user tools in the User Stamp menu under Stamp.  
❖ Program/Delete Stamp  
You can register, change, or delete user stamps.  
You can register up to four custom stamps with your favorite designs.  
❖ Stamp Format:1-4  
Specify how each of registered User Stamps 1 to 4 is printed.  
• Stamp Position  
3
Specify where to print the User Stamp.  
• Top Left  
• Top Center  
• Top Right  
• Center Left  
• Center  
• Center Right  
• Bottom Left  
• Bottom Center  
• Bottom Right  
• Stamp Position  
You can adjust the position of the User Stamp within the available ranges  
shown below.  
• Metric version:  
"Top Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Top Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm  
"Top Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Center Left"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Center"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm  
"Center Right"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm  
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
• Inch version:  
"Top Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Top Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"  
"Top Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Center Left"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Center"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"  
"Center Right"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"  
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
110  
   
Stamp  
• Page to Stamp  
Sets whether to print the stamp on all pages or only the first page.  
• All Pages  
• 1st Page Only  
❖ Stamp Color:1-4  
Sets the color registered in User Stamp color (1 to 4).  
• Yellow  
• Red  
• Cyan  
• Magenta  
• Green  
• Blue  
3
• Black  
Reference  
"User Stamp", Copy/Document Server Reference  
Date Stamp  
This section describes the user tools in the Date Stamp menu under Stamp.  
❖ Format  
You can select the date format for Date Stamp mode.  
• MM / DD / YYYY  
• MM.DD.YYYY  
• DD / MM / YYYY  
• DD.MM.YYYY  
• YYYY.MM.DD  
Default:  
• Metric version: DD / MM / YYYY  
• Inch version: MM / DD / YYYY  
❖ Font  
You can select the Date Stamp font.  
• Font 1  
• Font 2  
• Font 3  
111  
   
Copier / Document Server Features  
❖ Size  
You can set the Date Stamp size.  
• Auto  
• Large  
• Middle  
• Small  
❖ Superimpose  
You can have the Date Stamp printed in white when it overlaps black parts of  
the image.  
3
• On  
• Off  
❖ Stamp Color  
You can set the selected priority color when printing the date.  
• Yellow  
• Red  
• Cyan  
• Magenta  
• Green  
• Blue  
• Black  
❖ Stamp Setting  
Specify how Date Stamp is printed.  
• Stamp Position  
Specify where to print the Date Stamp.  
• Top Left  
• Top Center  
• Top Right  
• Bottom Left  
• Bottom Center  
• Bottom Right  
• Stamp Position  
You can adjust the position of the Date Stamp within the available ranges  
shown below.  
• Metric version:  
"Top Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Top Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm  
"Top Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm  
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
112  
Stamp  
• Inch version:  
"Top Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Top Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"  
"Top Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"  
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
• Page to Stamp  
Sets whether to print the stamp on all pages or only the first page.  
• All Pages  
• 1st Page Only  
3
Page Numbering  
This section describes the user tools in the Page Numbering menu under Stamp.  
❖ Stamp Format  
You can select the page number format given priority when [Page Numbering]  
is pressed.  
• P1,P2…  
• 1/5,2/5…  
• -1-,-2-…  
• P.1,P.2…  
• 1,2…  
• 1-1,1-2…  
❖ Font  
You can select the page number printed in Page Numbering mode.  
• Font 1  
• Font 2  
• Font 3  
❖ Size  
You can set the size of the stamp printed in Page Numbering mode.  
• Auto  
• Large  
• Middle  
• Small  
❖ Duplex Back Page Stamping Position  
You can set the position of the duplex back page number printed in Duplex  
mode.  
• Opposite Position  
• Same Position  
113  
   
Copier / Document Server Features  
❖ Page Numbering in Combine  
You can set page numbering when using the Combine function and the Page  
Numbering function together.  
• Per Original  
• Per Copy  
❖ Stamp Position on Designating Page  
You can select to print the page number onto slip sheets when using the Des-  
ignate function set to [Copy] and the Page Numbering function together.  
• On  
• Off  
3
❖ Stamp Position  
Specify how each of stamp is printed.  
• Stamp Position  
Specify where to print the stamp.  
• Top Left  
• Top Center  
• Top Right  
• Bottom Left  
• Bottom Center  
• Bottom Right  
• Stamp Position  
You can adjust the position of the stamp within the available ranges shown  
below.  
• Metric version:  
"Top Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Top Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm  
"Top Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm  
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm  
• Inch version:  
"Top Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Top Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"  
"Top Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"  
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"  
❖ Superimpose  
You can have page numbers printed in white when they overlap black parts  
of the image.  
• On  
• Off  
114  
Stamp  
❖ Stamp Color  
You can set the selected priority color when printing the date.  
• Yellow  
• Red  
• Cyan  
• Magenta  
• Green  
• Blue  
• Black  
3
❖ Page Numbering Initial Letter  
You can select the page numbering initial letter between "P1, P2.../P.1, P.2..."  
and "S1, S2.../S.1, S.2...".  
• P1, P2.../P.1, P.2...  
• S1, S2.../S.1, S.2...  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
115  
Copier / Document Server Features  
Input/Output  
This section describes the user tools in the Input/Output menu under Copier /  
Document Server Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Switch to Batch  
You can select to have Batch mode or SADF mode displayed when you press  
the [Special Original] key.  
• Batch  
3
• SADF  
❖ SADF Auto Reset  
In SADF mode, an original must be set within a specified time after the pre-  
vious original has been fed.  
You can adjust this time from 3 to 99 seconds in increments of 1 second.  
The default setting is 5 second(s).  
❖ Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue  
Specify to continue copying when paper of the required orientation has run  
out during rotate sort.  
• On  
Copying continues using copy paper of a different orientation. The copy  
job will finish even if you have left the machine.  
• Off  
When paper of the required orientation runs out, the machine stops copy-  
ing and prompts you to supply copy paper. After you have loaded paper,  
the machine will continue copying.  
❖ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart  
When memory becomes full while scanning originals, the machine can make  
copies of scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed scanning re-  
maining originals.  
• On  
You can leave the machine unattended to make copies, but sorted pages  
will not be sequential.  
• Off  
When memory becomes full, the machine stops operation allowing you to  
remove the copy pages delivered on the output tray.  
❖ Letterhead Setting  
If you select [Yes] in this function, the machine rotates the image correctly.  
• Yes  
• No  
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper might not be printed  
correctly depending on how the originals and paper are placed.  
116  
   
Input/Output  
❖ Staple Position  
Specify which Top 2 staples or Bottom shown on the initial display with pri-  
ority.  
The optional 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher, or booklet finisher is re-  
quired to use this function.  
• Top 1  
• Center  
• Left 2  
• Top 2  
• Bottom 1  
• Slant  
3
• Off  
❖ Punch Type  
Specify which punch type (2 holes or 3 holes) has priority to be shown on the  
initial display.  
The optional 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher, or booklet finisher is re-  
quired to use this function.  
• 2 Holes Left  
• 2 Holes Top  
• 3 Holes Left  
• 3 Holes Top  
• 4 Holes Left  
• 4 Holes Top  
• Off  
❖ Simplified Screen: Finishing Types  
You can select which key is displayed with higher priority for "Finishing  
Types" on the Simplified Screen.  
• Stack  
• Slant  
• Top 1  
• Bottom 1  
• Left 2  
• 2 Holes Left  
• 3 Holes Left  
• 4 Holes Left  
• Do not Display  
117  
Copier / Document Server Features  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
"Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper", Troubleshooting  
"Batch mode", Copy/ Document Server Reference  
"Sort", Copy/ Document Server Reference  
3
118  
Adjust Color Image  
Adjust Color Image  
This section describes the user tools in the Adjust Color Image menu under  
Copier / Document Server Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Background Density of ADS (Full Color)  
"The background density is adjusted to skip the texture and copy. You can ad-  
just the background density up to 5 levels when in Full Color.  
Center of the 5 level adjustment is set by default.  
3
❖ Color Sensitivity  
You can adjust the color specified to convert in "Color Convert" and the color  
specified for "Erase Color", in 5 levels.  
Center of the 5 level adjustment is set by default.  
When the color width has been set to "Wider", and the color to be deleted, for  
example is red, all the colors that are close to magenta and orange are deleted.  
If it's set to "Narrower" the color red will be deleted.  
❖ A.C.S. Sensitivity  
This 5-step setting determines the level of the standard used for discriminat-  
ing between black & white originals and full color originals when "Auto Col-  
or Select" is selected.  
Center of the 5 level adjustment is set by default.  
❖ A.C.S. Priority  
This setting determines the copy priority between "Black & White" and "Full  
Color" when "Auto Color Select" is selected.  
• Full Color  
• Black & White  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
119  
   
Copier / Document Server Features  
Settings for the Document Server  
For details, see "System Settings", and "Copier / Document Server Features".  
❖ Copier / Document Server Features  
Heading  
items  
Default  
General Features  
Customize Function: Document Server Storage 2 Sided Original:  
Top to Top  
General Features  
General Features  
General Features  
Customize Function: Document Server Storage 1 sided→  
Comb 2 orig  
3
Customize Function: Document Server Storage 1 sided→  
Comb 4 orig  
Customize Function: Document Server Storage 1 sided→  
Comb 8 orig  
General Features  
General Features  
Customize Function: Document Server Storage Create Margin  
Customize Function: Document Server Storage Off  
❖ System Settings  
Heading  
Item  
Default  
On  
General Features  
General Features  
General Features  
Warm-up Beeper  
Copy Count Display  
Output: Document Server  
Up  
Internal Tray 1  
Tray 1  
Off  
Tray Paper Settings Paper Tray Priority: Copier  
Tray Paper Settings Cover Sheet Tray  
Tray Paper Settings Slip Sheet Tray  
Off  
Timer Settings  
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer  
60 second(s)  
3 day(s)  
Administrator  
Tools  
Auto Delete File in Document Server  
Administrator  
Tools  
Delete All Files in Document Server  
-
Reference  
p.47 “System Settings”  
p.91 “Copier / Document Server Features”  
120  
   
4. Facsimile Features  
This chapter describes user tools in the Facsimile Features menu. For details on  
how to access Facsimile Features, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".  
General Features  
This section describes the user tools in the General Features menu under Facsim-  
ile Features.  
❖ Quick Operation Key (1-3)  
Frequently used functions programmed as Quick Operation keys are shown  
on the menu immediately after the power is turned on.  
If [On] is selected, the Quick Operation keys can be programmed with the fol-  
lowing items:  
• On  
• Manual E-mail RX  
• Send Later  
• Subject  
• Text  
• Recept. Notice  
• E-mail TX Results  
• BCC transmission  
• Std. Message  
• Fax Header Print  
• Label Insertion  
• Closed Network  
• SUB Code TX  
• SEP Code Reception  
• Stamp  
• Print Memory Lock  
• TX File Status  
• RX File Status  
• Journal  
• Print Stored RX File  
• TX Status Report  
• Forwarding  
• Switch RX Mode  
• SUB Code TX  
• Off  
121  
       
Facsimile Features  
Up to three functions can be programmed to Quick Operation keys.  
Functions that appear dimmed have already been set.  
❖ Switch Title  
Select the title to be shown on the destination list.  
• Title 1  
• Title 2  
• Title 3  
❖ Search Destination  
Select a destination list to be used in "Search Destination".  
You can select from Address Book, or registered LDAP Server.  
❖ Communication Page Count  
Checks the transmission, reception, and totals on the display.  
4
• Transmissions:  
Total number of transmitted pages  
• Receptions:  
Total number of received pages  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [General Features].  
C Press [Communication Page Count].  
D After checking the display, press [Exit].  
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❖ Adjust Sound Volume  
Adjust the sound volume during On Hook Mode and Immediate Transmis-  
sion.  
• On Hook Mode  
• At Transmission  
• At Reception  
• At Dialing  
• At Printing  
❖ Box Setting  
The following functions are for delivery and transfer of documents:  
• Personal Box  
• Information Box  
• Transfer Box  
For details about Box Setting, see "Box Settings".  
❖ Box Setting: Print List  
You can print a list of the currently registered Personal Boxes, Information  
Boxes, and Transfer Boxes.  
122  
General Features  
❖ On Hook Mode Release Time  
Use this function to specify a time to cancel On Hook mode after you transmit  
using On Hook dialing.  
• 1 minute  
• 3 minutes  
• 5 minutes  
• 10 minutes  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
p.172 “Box Settings”  
"Adjusting the Volume", Troubleshooting  
"Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)", Facsimile Reference  
"Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference  
"Reading the Display", Facsimile Reference  
4
123  
Facsimile Features  
Scan Settings  
This section describes the user tools in the Scan Settings menu under Facsimile  
Features.  
❖ Program / Change / Delete Scan Size  
You can program, change, or cancel frequently used scan sizes.  
For details about programming Scan Size, see "Program / Change / Delete  
Scan Size".  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
p.141 “Program / Change / Delete Scan Size”  
4
124  
   
Send Settings  
Send Settings  
This section describes the user tools in the Send Settings menu under Facsimile  
Features.  
❖ Max. E-mail Size  
When the other party has a limit on the size of e-mail messages that can be  
received, or sending data heavy e-mail causes problems, you can make set-  
tings to limit the size of sent e-mail. When this function is set to on, transmis-  
sion of e-mail that exceeds the set size is aborted.  
• On  
• Off  
When e-mail exceeds the maximum file size, an Error Report is output, and  
the e-mail is deleted.  
Even when e-mail does not exceed the size limit, it may be rejected if it does  
not meet the requirements of the server settings.  
4
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Send Settings].  
C Press [Max. E-mail Size].  
D Press [On].  
E Enter the maximum e-mail size using the number keys.  
Maximum e-mail size can be between 128 and 102,400 KB.  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter  
again.  
F Press [OK].  
125  
   
Facsimile Features  
❖ Program / Change / Delete Standard Message  
Program standard messages to be printed at the top of the first page of the  
original of the opposite party. It is useful for personalizing messages such as  
sending greetings.  
You can program three standard messages. You cannot change the "Confi-  
dential", "Urgent", "Please phone.", or "Copy to corres. section" messages.  
The procedure is the same for both programming and changing.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Send Settings].  
C Press [Program / Change / Delete Standard Message].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
To delete the registered message, press [Delete].  
4
E Select the message you want to program or change.  
To delete the registered message, select the message you want to delete,  
and then press [Yes].  
F Enter a new message.  
For details about entering text, see "Entering Text", About This Machine.  
G Press [OK].  
To cancel a registration, press [Cancel].  
H Press [Exit].  
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
126  
Send Settings  
❖ Backup File TX Setting  
You can specify whether or not to send to a selected folder the backup of a file  
sent by Memory Transmission.  
By setting [Backup File TX Setting] to [On] and selecting the destination folder,  
you can automatically send to the selected folder the backup of a file sent by  
Memory Transmission using the machine’s control panel, Web Image Moni-  
tor, DeskTopBinder, or LAN-Fax.  
Select the destination folder for the backup file from the address book.  
• On  
• Off  
If you set [Backup File TX Setting] to [On] but the Backup File TX fails, the ma-  
chine automatically prints a backup file TX communication failure report.  
For details about the communication failure report, see "Communication  
failure report", Facsimile Reference.  
4
Using the parameter settings (switch 04, bit 1), specify whether or not to  
print a communication failure report.  
The backup file format will be the same as that specified for files sent by  
Scan to Folder. Using the parameter settings (switch: 21, bit: 3), select TIFF  
or PDF as the format for sending a file. The format is factory-preset to TIFF.  
Using the parameter settings, you can specify the redial interval (switch 35,  
bits 0-7) and the maximum number of redials (switch 36, bits 0-7). The re-  
dial interval is factory-preset to 15 minutes; the maximum number of redi-  
als, to 192.  
Using the parameter settings, (switch 37, bit 0) you can specify whether to  
stop sending a backup file if the destination folder becomes full while the  
machine is sending or waiting to send a fax or the backup file.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Send Settings].  
C Press [Backup File TX Setting].  
D Press [On].  
If there is a folder already programmed, a folder name is shown. If you  
want to change the folder, press [Folder] and proceed to step 5.  
E Specify a folder for back up, and then press [OK].  
The folder name is shown to the right of [Folder].  
F Press [OK].  
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
"Communication failure report", Facsimile Reference  
"Maximum Values", Facsimile Reference  
127  
Facsimile Features  
Reception Settings  
This section describes the user tools in the Reception Settings menu under Fac-  
simile Features.  
❖ Switch Reception Mode  
Specify the method for receiving fax documents.  
• Manual Reception  
• Auto Reception  
❖ Program Special Sender  
By programming particular receivers as Special Sender in advance, you can  
have Special Senders treated differently.  
For details about how to program Special Sender, see "Special Senders to  
Treat Differently".  
4
❖ Program Special Sender: Print List  
You can print the Special Sender List.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Reception Settings].  
C Press [Program Special Sender: Print List].  
D Press the {Start} key.  
To cancel printing a list before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel] or the  
{Clear/Stop} key.  
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❖ Forwarding  
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be forwarded to a pro-  
grammed receiver.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Reception File Setting  
Selects whether received documents are saved on the hard disk to be printed  
later or printed immediately without being saved.  
For details about Reception File Setting, see "Reception File Setting".  
128  
     
Reception Settings  
❖ Stored Reception File User Setting  
The administrator can be specified for managing documents stored on the  
machine after fax documents are received. To specify the administrator, enter  
the administrator user code for managing documents using Web Image Mon-  
itor or DeskTopBinder.  
You must register the administrator's User Code to the destination list in advance.  
This function is only available when [Store] is selected in "Reception File Setting".  
It is recommended that you use a Web Image Monitor operating under the  
same network environment as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser  
may not open and an error may occur.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Reception Settings].  
C Press [Stored Reception File User Setting].  
D If you want to use a user code, press [On].  
4
E Press the Destination key of the user you wish to specify, and then press  
[OK].  
F Check the selected user, and then press [OK].  
When a programmed user is deleted from the destination list, message  
"Deleted from Address Book" is displayed. Enter the user again.  
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
If the programmed user code was deleted using the Address Book Manage-  
ment function under System Settings, you cannot view received and saved  
documents using a Web Image Monitor. Select [Off] in step 4 or reprogram the  
user code.  
❖ SMTP RX File Delivery Settings  
This function is available on systems that allow routing of e-mail received via  
SMTP.  
• On  
• Off  
When an authorized e-mail address is set, e-mail received from addresses that  
do not match the authorized address is discarded, and an error message is re-  
turned to the SMTP server.  
The authorized e-mail address is compared with the addresses of e-mail orig-  
inators, as illustrated by the following examples.  
• When the authorized e-mail address is set to "@aaa.abcd.com":  
[email protected] - accepted  
[email protected] - not accepted  
[email protected] - not accepted  
No Error Report is output even when e-mail is discarded.  
129  
Facsimile Features  
A Press [On].  
B Press [Change], and then enter the sending e-mail address to be authorized.  
4
If you make a mistake, press [Backspace] or [Clear], and then enter again.  
C Press [OK] twice.  
❖ 2 Sided Print  
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be printed on both sides  
of the paper.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Checkered Mark  
Specify whether or not a checkered mark is to be printed on the first page of  
received fax documents.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Center Mark  
Specify whether or not a center mark is to be printed halfway down the left  
side and at the top center of each page received.  
• On  
• Off  
130  
Reception Settings  
❖ Print Reception Time  
Specify whether or not the received date, time, and file number are printed at  
the bottom of received fax documents.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Reception File Print Quantity  
Specify the number of copies to be printed for each fax document received.  
• 1 to 10 set(s)  
❖ Paper Tray  
Use this function to print fax documents received from programmed senders  
and fax documents from other senders, using different paper trays.  
Display of tray names may differ depending on the options installed.  
4
• Tray 1  
• Tray 2  
• Tray 3 (option)  
• Tray 4 (option)  
• LCT (option)  
• Auto Select  
❖ Specify Tray for Lines  
Specify a paper tray for each line (telephone, Internet Fax, IP-Fax).  
• Off  
• On  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Reception Settings].  
C Press [Specify Tray for Lines], and then press [TNext].  
D Press [On].  
If you select [Off], the received fax is delivered to a default tray.  
131  
Facsimile Features  
E Select the line type.  
F Select a tray to deliver the received paper onto, and then press [OK].  
If you want to specify another line type, repeat from step 5.  
❖ Folder Transfer Result Report  
4
You can set whether the Folder Transfer Result Report is transmitted to the  
specified e-mail address, when folders are programmed as the forwarding  
destinations to which documents are sent from all senders or Special Senders.  
You must first register the destination for the Folder Transfer Result Report  
in the destination list. See "Registering a Fax Destination".  
Specify a group destination to transfer documents to multiple destinations. A  
maximum of 500 parties can be specified in a group. See "Registering Names  
to a Group".  
Even if the Folder Transfer Result Report is not successfully transmitted, the  
report is not printed on this machine.  
• E-mail  
• Do not E-mail  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Reception Settings].  
C Press [TNext].  
D Press [Folder Transfer Result Report].  
E To send the Folder Transfer Result Report, press [E-mail].  
To not send the Folder Transfer Result Report, press [Do not E-mail], and  
then press [OK].  
F Press [Notify Destination].  
G Press the Destination key of the e-mail address for notification, and then  
press [OK].  
H Check the selected destination, and then press [OK].  
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
132  
Reception Settings  
❖ Memory Lock Reception  
When you switch Memory Lock on, received documents are stored in mem-  
ory and not printed automatically. When a document is received in the Mem-  
ory Lock mode, the Confidential File indicator blinks. To print this document,  
enter the Memory Lock ID. A user without the ID cannot print the document.  
This prevents unauthorized users from accessing the document. To use Mem-  
ory Lock, program the Memory Lock ID, and then switch Memory Lock on.  
To store incoming documents from Special Senders only in Memory Lock,  
program each sender with "Special Senders to Treat Differently".  
This function is not available with Internet Fax.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Reception Settings], and then press [TNext].  
C Press [TNext].  
D Press [Memory Lock Reception].  
E Select [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].  
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
4
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
p.139 “Reception File Setting”  
p.49 “Output: Facsimile (facsimile)”  
p.159 “Special Senders to Treat Differently”  
p.135 “Program Memory Lock ID”  
p.225 “Registering a Fax Destination”  
p.257 “Registering Names to a Group”  
133  
 
Facsimile Features  
Initial Settings  
This section describes the user tools in the Initial Settings menu under Facsimile  
Features.  
❖ Parameter Setting  
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs.  
For details about Parameter Setting, see "Parameter Settings".  
❖ Parameter Setting: Print List  
You can print Parameter Setting list.  
Print this list to see the current User Parameter settings. However, not all the  
parameter settings are printed.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
4
C Press [Parameter Setting: Print List].  
D Press the {Start} key.  
To cancel printing a list before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel] or the  
{Clear/Stop} key.  
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❖ Program Closed Network Code  
Register an ID required for Closed Network communication.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
C Press [Program Closed Network Code].  
D Enter an ID using the number keys and [A] to [F], and then press [OK].  
Register a four-digit number using 0 to 9 and A to F (except for 0000 and  
FFFF).  
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
134  
   
Initial Settings  
❖ Program Memory Lock ID  
Program a Memory Lock ID to be entered before printing documents when  
the Memory Lock function is activated.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
C Press [Program Memory Lock ID].  
D Enter an ID using the number keys, and then press [OK].  
A Memory Lock ID can be any four-digit number, except 0000.  
4
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing  
[OK], and then try again.  
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❖ Internet Fax Settings  
You can select to display the Internet Fax icon or not. When you want to send  
an Internet Fax, set On to display the icon.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Select Dial / Push Phone  
Use this function to select a line type when the machine is connected to a G3  
analog line.  
Dial and Push lines are available for selection.  
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, settings for the extra G3  
lines appear.  
This function is not available in some regions.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
C Press [Select Dial / Push Phone].  
D Press [Push Button Phone] or [Dial Phone (10PPS)] to select the line, and then  
press [OK].  
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
135  
   
Facsimile Features  
❖ Program Fax Information  
Program information to be shown on the display of the other machine and  
printed as a report. The following information can be programmed.  
• Fax Header  
• Own Name  
• Own Fax Number  
For details about how to program Fax Information, see "Registering Fax In-  
formation".  
❖ Enable H.323  
Specify whether or not H.323 is used for IP-Fax transmission.  
• On  
• Off  
4
❖ Enable SIP  
Specify whether or not SIP is used for IP-Fax transmission.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ H.323 Settings  
Set the IPv4 address or host name, and alias telephone number of the gate-  
keeper.  
If you select [On] using the User Parameters, you can use the gatekeeper server.  
See "Parameter Settings" ( switch 34, bit 0).  
You can use numbers, and symbols ("#" and "*") for registration of the alias  
telephone number in H.323 Settings. Make sure you enter these characters  
correctly.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
C Press [H.323 Settings].  
D Press [Change] for each property.  
E Enter the IPv4 address or host name, and alias telephone number and  
press [OK].  
F Press [OK].  
136  
Initial Settings  
❖ SIP Settings  
Set the SIP server's IPv4 address or host name, and SIP user name.  
If you select [On] using the User Parameters, you can use the SIP server. See  
"Parameter Settings" ( switch 34, bit 1).  
You can use alphanumeric symbols (lower and upper cases) and symbols (";",  
"?", ":", "&", "=", "+", "$", ",", "-", "_", ".", "!", "~", "*", "#", "‘", "(", ")", "%", "/", and  
"@") for registration of the SIP User Name in SIP Settings. Make sure you enter  
these characters correctly.  
Use numbers and periods (".") to enter the correct IPv4 addresses for the gate-  
keeper, SIP server, and gateway. To obtain the correct IPv4 addresses, consult  
the administrator.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
C Press [SIP Settings].  
4
D Press [Change] for each property.  
A proxy server relays call requests and responses.  
A redirect server processes request destination inquiries.  
A register server registers location information of user agents (which cor-  
respond to telephones or facsimiles on public telephone lines) on an IP net-  
work.  
E Enter the IPv4 address or host name, and SIP user name, and then press  
[OK].  
F Specify whether to perform SIP digest authentication.  
If you select [On], enter the password using up to 128 characters.  
G Press [OK].  
❖ Program / Change / Delete Gateway  
Register, change, or delete the gateway used for transmission to IP-Fax.  
• Program / Change  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
C Press [Program / Change / Delete Gateway].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Press a gateway to register.  
When registering a new gateway, press [Not Programmed].  
137  
Facsimile Features  
F Press [Change] for "Prefix".  
G Enter the Prefix using the number keys, and then press [OK].  
To change the existing prefix, press [Clear], and then enter a new prefix.  
For documents sent using a gateway to G3 Fax, prefixes can be used. If  
the first several digits of IP-Fax number and the gateway- specific prefix  
are identical, documents can be transmitted using the registered digits  
of the gateway. For example, if both 03 and 04 have been registered as  
gateway number while 0312345678 is also specified, documents can be  
transmitted via a gateway for which 03 is used as a prefix.  
When you wish to use the gateways regardless of the IP-Fax destination  
numbers, register only the gateway addresses without registering the  
prefix.  
H Select a protocol.  
4
I Press [Change] for Gateway Address.  
J Enter the gateway address, and then press [OK].  
K Press [OK].  
• Delete  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
C Press [Program / Change / Delete Gateway].  
D Press [Delete], and then select a gateway to delete.  
E Press [Yes] on the confirmation message.  
If you do not want to delete the gateway you have selected, press [No].  
F Press [Exit].  
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
p.133 “Memory Lock Reception”  
p.144 “Registering Fax Information”  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
p.162 “Memory Lock”  
138  
Reception File Setting  
Reception File Setting  
Specify whether received documents are to be saved on the hard disk or printed  
immediately without being saved. You can print stored documents repeatedly  
or download them as images to a computer using a Web Image Monitor or Desk-  
TopBinder. If you select printing without saving, documents are printed each  
time they are received.  
If you have used System Settings to specify to have received faxes distributed to  
the delivery server, the documents cannot be saved on the hard disk.  
Important  
❒ The optional printer/scanner unit is required.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
4
B Press [Reception Settings].  
C Press [Reception File Setting].  
D Press [Print] or [Store], and then press [OK].  
To cancel your selection, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step .  
C
When [Store] is selected, you can select whether or not to send notice of recep-  
tion to a specific e-mail address. To notify of reception, press [Notify Destina-  
tion] and select an e-mail address from the Internet Fax destinations  
programmed in the address book. Further, you can register a group destina-  
tion. In such a case, a maximum of 500 destinations can be specified in a  
group.  
139  
       
Facsimile Features  
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ You can use "Parameter Settings" (switch 10, bit 5) to select whether or not  
to print stored received documents. See "Parameter Settings".  
❒ If [Store] is selected and a destination for notification is specified, notifica-  
tion of document reception can be sent to the specified e-mail address.  
❒ Documents saved on the hard disk are categorized as received and stored  
documents.  
❒ You cannot change to a different setting if received documents have been  
stored on the hard disk. To change to a different setting, print documents  
stored on the hard disk if necessary, and then delete them.  
❒ Received confidential documents are stored in memory. Use the Print Con-  
4
fidential RX File function to print them.  
❒ With [Store] selected, more memory space is used as the number of saved  
documents increases. After memory space becomes insufficient, no more  
documents are saved on the hard disk. When this happens, the machine  
starts printing then overwriting old documents.  
❒ You can store received documents up to a total of approximately 320 pages  
or 2,240 pages of A4 size Standard <ITU-T#1Chart>.  
❒ You cannot send received documents.  
❒ You cannot manage stored documents from the Document Server display.  
❒ It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor running under the  
same network environment as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser  
may not open and an error may occur.  
Reference  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
"Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored  
RX File)", Facsimile Reference  
"Sending Stored Documents", Facsimile Reference  
Reception Report e-mail  
When a received document is stored, this report is sent to the e-mail address set  
as the destination for notification.  
140  
   
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size  
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size  
Program frequently used scan sizes.  
Important  
❒ When programming or changing a scan size, it is recommended that you make  
a record of the new size.  
When you select a scan size to scan a custom size original, two custom sizes are  
available (Program Size 1 and Program Size 2). Use these functions to program  
a custom size in advance. The procedure is the same for programming and  
changing.  
You can program up to two sizes.  
Specify a horizontal length from 128 to 1200 mm, or from 5.5 to 47 inches.  
4
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Scan Settings].  
C Press [Program / Change / Delete Scan Size].  
D Select [Program Size 1] or [Program Size 2].  
141  
     
Facsimile Features  
E Enter a horizontal size using the number keys.  
Each time you press [mm] or [inch], the units switch between "mm" and "inch".  
If you enter a length and press [mm] or [inch], the length is converted automat-  
ically according to the unit (fractions are rounded off). For example, when  
you enter {2}, {2}, and {0} in millimeters and change to "inch", the length "8.7  
inch" is shown on the display. If you press [mm] or [inch] again, "221 mm" is  
displayed.  
4
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.  
To cancel a scan size, press [Cancel].  
F Select a vertical size, and then press [OK].  
The displayed vertical size differs depending on the selected unit. When [mm]  
is selected, [Auto Detect], [210 mm (A4)], [257 mm (B4 JIS)], [297 mm (A3)], [216 mm  
(8 1/2)], and [279 mm (11)] are shown. When [inch] is selected, [Auto Detect], [8.3  
inch (A4)], [10.1 inch (B4 JIS)], [11.7 inch (A3)], [8.5 inch], and [11.0 inch] are shown.  
To cancel a scan size, press [Cancel].  
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
142  
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size  
Deleting a scan size  
Delete programmed scan size.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Scan Settings].  
C Press [Program / Change / Delete Scan Size].  
D Press [Delete], and then select [Program Size 1] or [Program Size 2].  
4
E Press [Delete].  
To cancel deleting, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of step .  
D
F Press [Exit].  
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
143  
     
Facsimile Features  
Registering Fax Information  
You can send information to the other party when transmitting or receiving a fax  
document. This information is shown on the display of the other machine and  
printed as a report. The following information can be sent.  
Important  
❒ You can confirm programmed settings from the User Parameter List. It is rec-  
ommended that you print and keep the User Parameter List when you pro-  
gram or change settings. See "Parameter List".  
❒ In the USA, the Fax Header must contain the telephone number of the line  
your machine is connected to. It will be printed on the header of every page  
you send. Required in the USA.  
4
❖ Fax Header  
The Fax Header is printed as the header of every fax you send. You should  
include your name in the Fax Header.  
You can program Fax Header1 or Fax Header2. When you send originals us-  
ing the destination list, you can select which Fax Header is printed on the doc-  
ument received by the other party.  
You can register "Fax Header" using up to 32 alphanumeric characters and  
symbols.  
You can use characters, symbols, numbers, and spaces.  
You can set whether or not to print a Fax Header using [Fax Header Print] under  
Options . See "Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference  
❖ Own Name  
The Own Name is sent to the other party when you send or receive a fax . This  
name should include your name. The Own Name is shown on the display of  
the other machine and printed in a report.  
Own Name can be used only if the other machine is of the same manufacturer  
and has the Own Name function.  
You can register "Own Name" using up to 20 alphanumeric characters and  
symbols.  
❖ Own Fax Number  
The sender's Own Fax Number is sent to the other party when sending a fax.  
The received facsimile number is shown on the display of the other machine  
and printed in a report.  
This function is available regardless of the manufacturer of the other party's  
machine.  
You can register "Own Fax Number" using up to 20 numbers, space, and  
"+"symbol.  
Reference  
"Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference  
144  
     
Registering Fax Information  
Registering Fax Information  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
C Press [Program Fax Information].  
D Select the Fax Information you want to register or change.  
4
E Register the name and facsimile number.  
F Press [Exit].  
G Press the {User tools/Counter} key.  
Registering a Fax Header  
A Check that [Fax Header] is selected.  
B Press [First Name] or [Second Name].  
C Enter a fax header including your Own Name and Fax Number, and then  
press [OK].  
145  
     
Facsimile Features  
Registering an Own Name  
A Press [Own Name].  
B Press [Own Name].  
4
C Enter your own name, and then press [OK].  
Registering an Own Fax Number  
A Press [Own Fax Number].  
B Select line type to program.  
The display differs depending on the optional units installed on the machine.  
C Enter your own facsimile's number using the number keys, and then press  
[OK].  
To enter a + sign or a space, press [+] or [Space].  
146  
   
Registering Fax Information  
Changing Fax Information  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
C Press [Program Fax Information].  
D Select the Fax Information you want to change.  
To change a Fax Header, see "Registering a Fax Header".  
To change Own Name, see "Registering an Own Name".  
To change Own Fax Number, "Registering an Own Fax Number".  
E Press [Exit].  
4
F Press the {User tools/Counter} key.  
Reference  
p.145 “Registering a Fax Header”  
p.146 “Registering an Own Name”  
p.146 “Registering an Own Fax Number”  
Deleting Fax Information  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
C Press [Program Fax Information].  
D Press [Fax Header], [Own Name], or [Own Fax Number] to delete.  
E Press the item you want to delete.  
F Press [Backspace] or [Delete All], and then press [OK].  
When deleting your own facsimile's number, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop}  
key, and then press [OK].  
G [Exit].  
H Press the {User tools/Counter} key.  
147  
     
Facsimile Features  
Forwarding  
Print documents received and forward to a specified End Receiver. This is useful  
if, for example, you are visiting another office and would like a copy of your doc-  
uments to be sent to that office.  
You can also specify a "folder" as the forwarding destination.  
Important  
❒ To use this function, set Forwarding under Reception Settings to On (enable).  
❒ You can select end receivers only from among destinations programmed in  
the Address Book. You cannot specify programmed transfer stations as end  
receivers.  
A fax number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder can be set as the  
forwarding destination.  
4
Even when [On] is selected for "Forwarding" in "Reception Settings", if [Off] is se-  
lected for the forwarding destination in this function, only printing is per-  
formed, not forwarding.  
When you wish to change the end receivers depending on the senders, specify  
the end receivers by the senders, at "Program Special Sender". Documents not re-  
ceived from specified senders are sent to the destination specified in this func-  
tion.  
You can specify whether or not to print forwarded documents. See "Parameter  
Settings"(switch 11, bit 6).  
Deleting a destination specified as a forward destination from the destination  
list causes the settings of the forward destination to be deleted, so they must be  
registered again. When a destination is changed, a document is transmitted to  
the new destination. If there is no destination of the specified type, you can set  
which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See "Parameter Set-  
tings" (switch 32, bit 0).  
You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this func-  
tion.  
If you have specified a folder for forwarding, you can specify the file format  
used for forwarding. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 21, bit 3).  
Reference  
p.121 “General Features”  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
p.128 “Reception Settings”  
p.159 “Special Senders to Treat Differently”  
148  
     
Forwarding  
Programming an End Receiver  
Important  
❒ One end receiver can be registered for each special sender. To register two or  
more end receivers, use group destination. However, a maximum of 500 des-  
tinations can be specified in a group.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Reception Settings].  
C Press [Forwarding].  
D Press [On].  
4
If there is an End Receiver already programmed, a receiver name is shown. If  
you want to change the receiver, press [Receiver] and proceed to step .  
E
To cancel Forwarding, press [Off]and proceed to step .  
F
149  
   
Facsimile Features  
E Specify an End Receiver using the destination list, and then press [OK].  
The receiver name is shown to the right of [Receiver].  
Press the key on the left of the display to switch the destination between fax  
number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.  
4
Set a folder destination in Address Book Management under Administrator  
Tools in the System Settings menu. See "Registering Folders".  
If you have specified a folder for forwarding, you can specify the file format  
used for forwarding. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 21, bit 3).  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.  
F Press [OK].  
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Reference  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
p.240 “Registering Folders”  
150  
   
Forwarding  
Quitting the forwarding function  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Reception Settings].  
C Press [Forwarding].  
D Press [Off], and then press [OK].  
4
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Forwarding Mark  
You can print a Forwarding Mark on receiver's documents that have been for-  
warded.  
The receiver can distinguish between forwarded and normally received documents.  
This function is not available when memory forwarding is performed to a folder  
destination.  
Reference  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
151  
       
Facsimile Features  
Parameter Settings  
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs. To  
change function settings, set the User Parameter Switches.  
❖ Switches and Bits  
Each User Parameter has a set of switches, and each of the switches consist of  
eight bits, whose values are "0" or "1". The right most bit is bit 0 and the left  
most is bit 7. You can adjust the settings to match your needs by switching the  
value of bits between "0" and "1".  
• Switch 02  
0
↓
7
0
↓
6
1
↓
5
1
↓
4
1
↓
3
0
↓
2
1
↓
1
1
↓
0
4
❖ User Parameter List  
User Parameter Switches are outlined in the following table.  
Switch Bit  
Item  
0
1
02  
02  
03  
0
3
0
Forwarding Mark  
TSI Print  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Automatic printing of the Communication  
Result Report  
03  
03  
03  
03  
2
3
4
5
Automatic printing of the Memory Storage Off  
Report  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Whether or not to print the SEP CodeRX Reserve Off  
Report automatically.  
Whether or not to print the SEP Code RX Result Off  
Report automatically.  
Automatic printing of the Immediate TX Result Off  
Report  
03  
04  
7
0
Automatic printing of the Journal  
Off  
On  
On  
Automatic printing of the Confidential File Off  
Report  
04  
1
Automatic printing of Communication Failure Off  
Report and Transfer Result Report  
On  
04  
04  
04  
05  
4
5
7
0
Indicates the parties  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Include sender's name on reports  
Include a portion of the image on reports  
On  
On  
Receive Service Call (SC) Condition (Substi- Possible  
tute Reception during service call)  
Notpossible  
(Substitute (Reception  
RX) off)  
152  
     
Parameter Settings  
Switch Bit  
Item  
0
1
05  
2,1  
Substitute the reception when the machine  
cannot print (because paper is jammed, all  
paper trays have run out of paper, toner is  
empty, or all paper trays are out of order)  
00: Enabled  
uncondi-  
tionally  
-
(Free)  
01: Enabled  
when Own  
Name/  
Own Fax  
Number is  
received  
10: Enabled  
for Closed  
Network  
Code match  
4
11: Disabled  
(Reception  
off)  
05  
05  
07  
5
7
0
Print sheet is limited to that which has high- Off  
est priority.  
On  
On  
Empty tray alert (Paper Empty Warning)  
even when one paper tray is empty  
Off  
Whether or not to produce a beeping sound Beep  
when the machine receives a fax.  
Donotsend  
a voice  
message.  
07  
08  
2
2
Parallel Memory Transmission  
Authorized Reception Type  
Off  
On  
Receive  
Receive all  
from speci- documents  
fied send-  
ers only.  
exceptfrom  
specified  
senders.  
10  
10  
10  
3
5
6
Page reduction when printing  
Reception file setting  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Use both e-mail notification and printed re- Off  
ports to confirm the transmission results  
11  
14  
6
0
Local print when forwarding  
Off  
On  
Print documents received with Auto Power- Immediate When turn-  
On Reception (Night Printing mode)  
printing  
(On)  
ing on the  
operation  
switch  
(Off)  
14  
14  
1
3
Long Document Transmission (Well Log)  
Reset when function changed  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
153  
Facsimile Features  
Switch Bit  
Item  
0
1
15  
0, 1, 2  
Selecting the available paper feed tray.  
001: Tray 1  
010: Tray 2  
011: Tray 3  
100: Tray 4  
-
101: Large  
Capacity  
Tray (LCT)  
15  
17  
5
2
Whether or not to select the available paper Off  
feed tray.  
On  
Whether you need to press [Add] after speci- Not neces- Necessary  
fying a destination with the Destination key sary  
when broadcasting  
17  
17  
3
7
Whether or not to reset the settings when  
original is scanned.  
On  
Off  
4
Receive documents by pressing the {Start}  
Off (no doc- On (docu-  
uments re- ments re-  
key when originals are not set.  
ceived after ceived after  
pressing the pressing the  
{Start} key) {Start} key)  
18  
18  
18  
18  
19  
0
1
2
3
0
Print date with Fax Header  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Print transmitter origin with Fax Header  
Print file number with Fax Header  
Print page number with Fax Header  
Use paper delivery shift function (Offset  
Print)  
19  
20  
1
0
Sort Journal by line type  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Automatic printing of the LAN-Fax Result  
Report.  
154  
Parameter Settings  
Switch Bit  
20  
Item  
0
1
5,4,3,2 Reprinting time of stored documents in  
memory that could not be printed using  
LAN-Fax Driver  
0000:  
0 minutes  
-
0001:  
1 minutes  
0010:  
2 minutes  
0011:  
3 minutes  
0100:  
4 minutes  
0101:  
5 minutes  
0110:  
6 minutes  
4
0111:  
7 minutes  
1000:  
8 minutes  
1001:  
9 minutes  
1010:  
10 minutes  
1011:  
11 minutes  
1100:  
12 minutes  
1101:  
13 minutes  
1110:  
14 minutes  
1111:  
15 minutes  
21  
0
Print results of sending Reception Notice Re- Off  
On  
quest message  
(print only  
when an er-  
ror occurs)  
21  
21  
1
3
Respond to e-mail reception acknowledg-  
ment request  
Off  
On  
File format for files forwarded to folder des- TIFF  
tinations  
PDF  
On  
21  
21  
4
6
Transmit Journal by E-mail  
Display Network error  
Off  
Display  
(On)  
Not display  
(Off)  
21  
22  
7
0
Transmit Error Mail Notification  
On  
Off  
Detect a dial tone before sending faxes when Not detect  
using the telephone line (LINE) (Off)  
Detect  
(On)  
155  
Facsimile Features  
Switch Bit  
Item  
0
1
22  
22  
24  
24  
1
2
0
1
Detect a dial tone before sending faxes when Not detect  
using the telephone line (LINE2) (Off)  
Detect  
(On)  
Detect a dial tone before sending faxes when Not detect  
using the telephone line (LINE3) (Off)  
Detect  
(On)  
Store documents that could not be transmit- Off  
ted in memory  
On  
Length of time documents that could not be 24 hours  
transmitted are stored in memory  
72 hours  
24  
32  
2
0
Whether to retain the stored file permanently No  
Yes  
Select which order of priority to be used to  
Paper Out- Electronic  
select an alternative destination when there put Priority Output Pri-  
is no destination of the specified type.  
ority  
<Priority  
Order>  
4
<Priority  
Order>  
1. IP-Fax  
destination 1. E-mail ad-  
dress  
2. Fax num-  
ber  
2. Folder  
3. E-mail ad- 3. IP-Fax  
dress  
destination  
4. Folder  
4. Fax num-  
ber  
34  
34  
35  
0
1
Use gatekeeper server with IP-Fax  
Use SIP server with IP-Fax  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
7, 6, 5, Redial interval when sending a backup file  
4, 3, 2,  
1, 0  
00000000:  
0 minute(s)  
00000001:  
1 minute(s)  
00000010:  
2 minute(s)  
.
.
00001111:  
15 minute(s)  
.
.
11111111:  
25 5  
minute(s)  
156  
Parameter Settings  
Switch Bit  
Item  
0
1
36  
7, 6, 5, Maximum number of redials when sending a 00000000:  
4, 3, 2, backup file  
1, 0  
1 time(s)  
00000001:  
2 time(s)  
00000010:  
3 time(s)  
.
.
11000000:  
195 time(s)  
.
.
4
11111111:  
254 time(s)  
37  
37  
0
Whether to stop sending a backup file if the No  
destination folder becomes full while the  
machine is sending or waiting to send a fax  
or the backup file  
Yes  
3, 2  
Whether to print the backup file if it cannot 00:  
be sent  
Do not print  
01:  
Print first  
page only  
10:  
Print whole  
file  
157  
Facsimile Features  
Changing the User Parameters  
This section describes how to set parameters.  
Important  
❒ Access to some User Parameter Settings may require options, or other settings  
may need to be made beforehand.  
❒ It is recommended that you print and keep a User Parameter list when you  
program or change a User Parameter.  
❒ Do not change any bit switches other than those shown on the previous pages.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Initial Settings].  
4
C Press [Parameter Setting].  
D Select the switch number you want to change.  
E Select the bit number you want to change.  
When the bit number is pressed, the current value switches between 1 and 0.  
Repeat from step to change another bit number for the same switch.  
E
F Press [OK].  
To cancel these settings, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step .  
D
G Repeat step through step to change the switch settings.  
D
E
H After all the settings are finished, press [Exit].  
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
158  
       
Special Senders to Treat Differently  
Special Senders to Treat Differently  
By programming particular senders in advance, you can set the following func-  
tion for each sender:  
• Authorized RX  
• Forwarding  
• Reception File Print Qty  
• Print 2 Sided  
• Memory Lock  
• Paper Tray  
Use Own Name or Own Fax Number to program your senders. If the sender has  
a machine of the same manufacturer, program an Own Name that has already  
been programmed as a sender. If the machine is not from the same manufacturer,  
Own Fax Number is used.  
4
You can apply the same settings to all programmed numbers. You can then cus-  
tomize the settings for individual numbers as necessary using the Special Sender  
Registration function.  
The following items can be programmed.  
• Special Senders  
Up to 30 Special Senders can be registered. A maximum of 20 characters can  
be used or each name when using G3.  
• Full/Partial agreement  
When you program own names and facsimile names for multiple destinations,  
you can program a common sequence of characters to identify destinations.  
Destination to be programmed  
(Own Name)  
Number of programmed identifications  
NEW YORK BRANCH  
HONG KONG BRANCH  
SYDNEY BRANCH  
3
Using Partial matching  
Destination to be programmed  
(Own Name)  
Number of programmed identifications  
BRANCH  
1
You can program up to 30 wild cards.  
Spaces are ignored when identifications are compared.  
You can use wild cards for the following functions:  
• Forwarding  
• Special Senders  
• Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)  
When using Partial agreement, you can enter up to the first 24 characters of  
an e-mail address to use it as an own name or facsimile name.  
159  
       
Facsimile Features  
Note  
❒ You cannot program senders as Special Senders if they do not have Own  
Name or Own Fax Number programmed.  
❒ The machine cannot differentiate between Polling Reception and Free Polling  
documents from Special Senders.  
❒ You cannot use the following functions with Internet Fax receptions.  
• Authorized RX  
• Reception File Print Qty  
• Memory Lock  
❒ You can program up to 24 characters for the sender.  
❒ To use Forwarding, Print 2 Sided, or Paper Tray with Internet Fax reception,  
program the sender's e-mail address.  
4
❒ You can check Own Name and Own Fax Number using the Journal. You can  
check programmed Special Senders using the specified sender list.  
❒ If you select "Off" for the Special Sender function in "Initial Set Up", the set-  
tings will be the same as the Reception Settings.  
Authorized Reception  
Use this function to limit incoming senders.  
The machine only receives faxes from programmed Special Senders, and there-  
fore, it helps you screen out unwanted documents, such as junk mail, and saves  
wasting fax paper.  
Note  
❒ To use this function, program the Special Senders function, and then select  
"On" in "Authorized RX" with "Reception Settings". See "Parameter Settings"  
(switch 08, bit 2).  
❒ Without programming Special Senders, the Authorized RX function will not  
work, even if you select "On".  
❒ If you select "Off" for "Authorized RX" in "Initial Set Up", settings are the same  
as the Reception Settings.  
❒ You can change Special Senders in the same way as you program them.  
Reference  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
Facsimile Reference "Reception Settings"  
160  
   
Special Senders to Treat Differently  
Reception File Print Quantity  
Print the specified number of copies of documents received from programmed  
senders (Special Senders).  
If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine prints the specified  
number of copies for all received documents.  
Note  
❒ You cannot use multi-copy printing with Memory Lock.  
❒ You can specify up to 10 copies.  
Forwarding  
4
Print received documents, and then transfer them to those receivers pro-  
grammed beforehand.  
Folder destination can be registered.  
It is also possible to forward faxes sent only by senders programmed as Special  
Senders.  
Note  
❒ To use this function, program your Special Senders, and then select "On" for  
"Forwarding" in "Reception Settings".  
❒ If you specify "On" in "Forwarding" and select [Same as Basic Settings], the fax doc-  
ument is forwarded to the receivers programmed in "Specify End Receiver.".  
❒ If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine transfers all incom-  
ing documents to the other end receivers specified in "Specify End Receiver.".  
❒ You can set the fax destination, Internet fax destination, IP-Fax destination or  
folder destination, as a forward destination.  
❒ Set folder destinations using the Address Book Management function under  
System Settings. See "Registering Folders".  
Reference  
p.148 “Forwarding”  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
"Reception Settings", Facsimile Reference  
Print 2 Sided  
Print on both sides of the paper.  
Note  
❒ If you select the bypass tray for "Paper Tray", duplex printing is disabled.  
161  
         
Facsimile Features  
Memory Lock  
Store incoming documents from programmed senders (Special Senders) in  
memory without printing them. People without the Memory Lock ID cannot  
print the documents, and therefore this function is useful for receiving confiden-  
tial documents . If you do not program any senders, the machine receives fax  
document from all senders using Memory Lock reception.  
Important  
❒ You must register Memory Lock ID in advance.  
❒ If you program the same sender in Memory Lock and Forwarding, Forward-  
ing is disabled.  
Reference  
p.135 “Program Memory Lock ID”  
4
Paper Tray  
Print documents received from programmed senders (Special Senders) and the  
documents from other senders on different types of paper.  
For example, if blue paper is in Tray 1 and white paper is in Tray 2, the machine  
prints the documents from Special Senders on the blue paper and prints the doc-  
uments from other senders on the white paper, making it easy for you to sepa-  
rate the two.  
If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine outputs documents re-  
ceived from all senders using the default paper tray.  
Note  
❒ If the machine receives a document that has a different size from the paper in  
the specified tray, the machine prints it after splitting it or minimizing its size.  
❒ Selection of the bypass tray enables you to specify the paper size in "Scan Ar-  
ea".  
Reference  
"Placing Originals", Facsimile Reference  
162  
         
Special Senders to Treat Differently  
Programming/Changing Special Senders  
Program and change Special Senders.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Reception Settings].  
C Press [Program Special Sender].  
D Check [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the sender to program or change.  
4
F Enter a sender name, and then press [OK].  
Enter a destination name using Own Name or Own Fax Number.  
G Press [Full Agreement] or [Partial Agreement].  
163  
     
Facsimile Features  
H Select the item you want to program.  
You must select only the item you want to program.  
To cancel these settings, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step .  
E
4
I Press [OK].  
A Special Sender is programmed.  
To program another sender, repeat the procedure from step .  
E
J Press [Exit].  
K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Reference  
p.159 “Full/Partial agreement”  
p.165 “Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)”  
p.166 “Forwarding”  
p.165 “Reception File Print Qty”  
p.167 “Print 2 Sided”  
p.167 “Memory Lock”  
p.167 “Paper Tray per Sender”  
164  
 
Special Senders to Treat Differently  
Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)  
Specify when programming a Special Sender.  
A Press [Authorized Reception per Sender].  
B Press [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].  
4
Reception File Print Qty  
Specify when programming a Special Sender.  
A Press [RX File Print Quantity per Sender].  
B Press [Number of Sets].  
C Enter the print quantity using the number keys, and then press [OK].  
Note  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for  
"RX File Print Qty" of "Reception Settings".  
❒ If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing  
[OK], and then try again.  
165  
       
Facsimile Features  
Forwarding  
Specify when programming a Special Sender.  
Important  
❒ One forward destination can be registered for each Special Sender. To register  
two or more forward destinations, use group destinations. However a maxi-  
mum of 500 destinations can be specified in a group.  
A Press [Forwarding per Sender].  
B Select [On] or [Off].  
If you select [Off], proceed to step .  
D
4
C Press the Destination key of a forward destination, and then press [OK].  
D Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for  
"Forwarding" under "Administrator Tools".  
❒ Press the key on the left of the display to switch the destination between  
fax number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.  
❒ When a folder is specified as the forward destination, you can set a file for-  
mat for forwarding. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 21, bit 3).  
❒ Deleting a destination specified as a forward destination from the destina-  
tion list causes the settings of the forward destination to be deleted, so they  
must be registered again. When a destination is changed, a document is  
transmitted to the new destination. If there is no destination of the speci-  
fied type, you can set which destination to be used as an alternative desti-  
nation. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).  
❒ After you perform step , set "Forwarding" of "Reception Settings" to "On".  
J
Reference  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
p.240 “Registering Folders”  
166  
     
Special Senders to Treat Differently  
Print 2 Sided  
Specify when programming a Special Sender.  
A Press [2 Sided Print per Sender].  
B Press [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].  
Note  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for "2  
Sided Print" of "Reception Settings".  
Memory Lock  
4
Specify when programming a Special Sender.  
A Press [Memory Lock Reception per Sender].  
B Press [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].  
Note  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for  
"Program Memory Lock ID" under "Administrator Tools".  
Paper Tray per Sender  
Specify when programming a Special Sender.  
A Press [Paper Tray per Sender].  
B Select the tray you want to use, and then press [OK].  
Note  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for  
"Paper Tray" of "Reception Settings".  
167  
           
Facsimile Features  
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender  
Program the "Initial Set Up" of a Special Sender. You can also specify the Bypass  
Tray Paper Size.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Reception Settings].  
C Press [Program Special Sender].  
D Press [Initial Set Up].  
4
E Select the function you want to program.  
In this feature, "Authorized RX" has the same settings as "Reception Settings".  
F To program Authorized RX and Special RX Function, press [Authorized Re-  
ception] or [Special Reception Function].  
168  
   
Special Senders to Treat Differently  
G Press [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].  
The illustration shows the "Authorized RX" display as an example.  
H To program Bypass Tray Paper Size, press [Bypass Tray Paper Size].  
You can select a size from [Auto Detect], [Regular Size], or [Custom Size].  
If you select [Auto Detect], proceed to steps and .  
4
I
N
If you select [Regular Size], proceed to steps , and .  
I J  
N
If you select [Custom Size], proceed to steps and to .  
I
K
N
I Select the size you want to program.  
If you select [Regular Size], select a paper size displayed, and then proceed to  
step .  
N
If you select [Custom Size], proceed to step .  
K
J Select the size you want to program from the sizes shown.  
K Make sure that [Vertical] is selected.  
169  
     
Facsimile Features  
L Enter the vertical size of the paper using the number keys, and then press  
the {q} key.  
Specify a vertical size from 90 mm (3.6") to 305 mm (12.0"). You cannot enter  
a size smaller than 90 mm or larger than 305 mm.  
4
Each time you press [mm] or [inch], the units switch between "mm" and "inch".  
If you enter a length and change the units by pressing [mm] or [inch], it is con-  
verted automatically (fractions are rounded off).  
M Enter the horizontal size of the paper using the number keys, and then  
press the {q} key.  
Specify a horizontal size from 148 mm (5.9") to 600 mm (23.7"). You cannot en-  
ter a size smaller than 148 mm or larger than 600 mm.  
Each time you press [mm] or [inch], the units switch between "mm" and "inch".  
If you enter a length and change the units by pressing [mm] or [inch], it is con-  
verted automatically (fractions are rounded off).  
N Press [OK].  
O Press [Exit].  
P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ If you select [Auto Detect], the machine recognizes the paper size automati-  
cally.  
Reference  
"Reception Settings", Facsimile Reference  
170  
 
Special Senders to Treat Differently  
Deleting a Special Sender  
Use this function to delete "Initial Set Up" of a Special Sender. The Bypass Tray  
Paper Size can also be deleted.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [Reception Settings].  
C Press [Program Special Sender].  
D Press [Delete], and then select the Special Sender you want to delete.  
E Press [Yes].  
To cancel deleting a special sender, press [No]. The display returns to that of  
4
step .  
D
F Press [Exit].  
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
171  
     
Facsimile Features  
Box Settings  
The following functions are for delivery and transfer of documents:  
• Personal Box  
• Information Box  
• Transfer Box  
❖ SUB Code and SEP Code  
SUB Code and SEP Code are IDs consisting of up to 20 digits, and can include  
numbers, #, *, and spaces.  
To use this function, you must program a box and SUB/SEP Code before-  
hand. The other party can send documents to, and retrieve stored documents  
from, this box using the code.  
4
Note  
❒ The combined total of items that can be stored using the Personal Box, Infor-  
mation Box, and Transfer Box functions is 150.  
❒ You cannot set the same Box code on two different boxes.  
❒ Transmission or programming may not be allowed if there is not enough free  
memory left. The amount of free memory left differs depending on the op-  
tional equipment installed.  
Programming/Changing Personal Boxes  
This section describes how to program Personal Boxes.  
You can program the following items:  
• Box name (required)  
Up to 20 characters long  
• SUB Code (required)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces  
(the first character cannot be a space).  
• Password (optional)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces  
(the first character cannot be a space).  
When programming a password, a mark is displayed before the Box name.  
• Receiver (optional)  
You can program one delivery destination for each Personal Box. Specify a  
delivery destination programmed in Destination key.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [General Features].  
C Press [Box Setting].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
172  
         
Box Settings  
E Select a box to program.  
When programming a new box, press [Not Programmed].  
To change a box already programmed, press it and proceed to step .  
H
4
F Press [Personal Box].  
G Enter a box name, and then press [OK].  
H Enter a SUB Code.  
To change the SUB Code, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try  
again. To change a Box name, press [Box Name], and then repeat from step .  
G
I Specify the settings you require.  
If you do not want to program a password or receiver, proceed to step .  
P
J Press [Password].  
173  
     
Facsimile Features  
K Enter a password, and then press [OK].  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing  
[OK], and then try again.  
4
L Re-enter the password, and then press [OK].  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing  
[OK], and then try again.  
To change the password after pressing [OK], press [Change] and repeat steps  
K
and , or press [Cancel] and repeat from step .  
L
J
M Press [OK].  
N Press [Receiver].  
O Select a destination using the destination list, and then press [OK].  
Press the key on the left of the display to switch the destination between fax  
number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.  
P Press [OK].  
Q Press [Exit].  
174  
     
Box Settings  
R Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ When programming a password, a mark is displayed before the Box name.  
❒ Specify a fax number, Internet Fax destination and IP-Fax destination as  
the transmission destination.  
❒ The Fax Header is not printed on delivered documents.  
❒ If a document cannot be delivered, a Communication Failure Report is  
printed and the document is saved as a Confidential Reception document.  
❒ You can edit boxes in the same way you program them. However, boxes  
that are being used cannot be edited.  
❒ If a destination in the destination table is deleted after being registered, de-  
livery is not performed and the settings of the delivery destination are also  
deleted. Also, when a delivery destination is changed, a document is sent  
to the changed destination. If there is no destination of the specified type,  
you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See  
"Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).  
4
Reference  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
"Personal Boxes", Facsimile Reference  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
Deleting Personal Boxes  
This section describes how to delete Personal Boxes.  
Important  
❒ If there are documents in the box, you cannot delete the box.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [General Features].  
C Press [Box Setting].  
D Press [Delete], and then select the box you want to delete.  
175  
     
Facsimile Features  
E If the password is programmed, enter a password using the number keys,  
and then press [OK].  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.  
4
F Press [Delete].  
To cancel deleting a box, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of  
step .  
D
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Programming/Changing Information Boxes  
This section describes how to set up an Information Box.  
You can store the following items:  
• Box name (required)  
Up to 20 characters long  
• SEP Code (required)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces  
(the first character cannot be a space).  
• Password (optional)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces  
(the first character cannot be a space).  
When programming a password, a mark is displayed before the Box name.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [General Features].  
C Press [Box Setting].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
176  
   
Box Settings  
E Select the box to program.  
When programming a new box, press [Not Programmed].  
To change a box already programmed, press it, and then proceed to step . If  
H
a password is programmed, enter the password, press [OK], and then proceed  
4
to step .  
H
F Press [Information Box].  
G Enter a box name, and then press [OK].  
H Enter the SEP Code.  
To change the SEP Code, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try  
again. To change the box name, press [Box Name], and then repeat the proce-  
dure from step .  
G
I Press [Password].  
If you do not want to program a password, proceed to step .  
L
177  
   
Facsimile Features  
J Enter a password, and then press [OK].  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing  
[OK], and then try again.  
4
K Re-enter the password, and then press [OK].  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing  
[OK], and then try again.  
L Press [OK].  
M Press [Exit].  
N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ You can edit boxes in the same way you program them. However, boxes  
that are being used cannot be edited.  
❒ If a destination in the destination list is deleted after being registered, de-  
livery is not performed and the settings of the delivery destination are also  
deleted. Also, when a delivery destination is changed, a document is sent  
to the changed destination. If there is no destination of the specified type,  
you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See  
"Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).  
Reference  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
"Information Boxes", Facsimile Reference  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
178  
 
Box Settings  
Deleting Information Boxes  
This section describes how to delete Information Boxes.  
Important  
❒ If there are documents in the box, you cannot delete the box.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [General Features].  
C Press [Box Setting].  
D Press [Delete], and then select the box you want to delete.  
4
E If the password is programmed, enter a password using the number keys,  
and then press [OK].  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.  
F Press [Delete].  
To cancel deleting a box, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of  
step .  
D
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
179  
     
Facsimile Features  
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes  
This section describes how to set up an Transfer Box.  
This function turns the machine into a fax relay station. Documents sent with a  
SUB Code that matches the SUB Code programmed as a Transfer Box are re-  
ceived, and then relayed to a programmed receiver.  
Since documents can be sent to multiple destinations in a single transfer request,  
you can economize on call charges when sending to distant destinations.  
4
Inform the Requesting Party of the SUB Code assigned to the Transfer Box.  
When they want to have a document transferred by your machine, ask them to  
send the document using SUB Code Transmission and specifying this SUB  
Code. If a password has also been programmed, inform them of this too, and ask  
them to enter it as the SID code.  
You can store the following items:  
• Box name (required)  
Up to 20 characters  
• SUB Code (required)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces  
(the first character cannot be a space).  
• End Receiver (required)  
You can store five End Receivers (destinations to which documents are for-  
warded) for each box. Specify End Receivers using a single or group destina-  
tion programmed in the destination list beforehand.  
• Password (optional)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces  
(the first character cannot be a space).  
When programming a password, a mark is displayed in front of the Box  
name.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [General Features].  
C Press [Box Setting].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
180  
   
Box Settings  
E Select the box to program.  
When programming a new box, press [Not Programmed].  
To change a box already programmed, press it, and then proceed to step .  
H
4
F Press [Transfer Box].  
G Enter a Box name, and then press [OK].  
H Enter a SUB Code.  
To change the SUB Code, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try  
again. To change Box name, press [Box Name], and then repeat from step .  
G
I To Program End Receivers, Select an Receiving Station.  
You can store five Receiving Station.  
181  
     
Facsimile Features  
J Specify End Receivers with Destination keys, and then press [OK].  
You can change the display to the fax destination, Internet fax destination,  
and IP-Fax destination using the key on the left side of the display.  
A reception station can also be registered as a group destination. In such a  
case, a maximum of 500 parties including End Receivers 1-5 can be specified  
in a group.  
4
To register another End Receiver, repeat from step .  
I
K To program a password, press [Password].  
If you do not want to program a password, proceed to step .  
N
L Enter a password, and then press [OK].  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing  
[OK], and then try again.  
M Re-enter the password, and then press [OK].  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing  
[OK], and then try again.  
To change the password after pressing [OK], press [Change] and repeat steps  
L
and , or press [Cancel] and repeat from step .  
M
K
N Press [OK].  
O Press [Exit].  
182  
       
Box Settings  
P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ After documents are transferred, Transfer Result Reports are not sent back  
to the sender.  
❒ Specify the Internet fax destination and IP-Fax destination as a reception  
station.  
❒ After documents are transferred, they are deleted.  
❒ When this function is set to on, the machine prints out the received docu-  
ments it transfers and a Transfer Result Report after the transfer has fin-  
ished. If you do not want it to print, contact your service representative.  
❒ When the programmed receiver is a group destination for Multi-step  
Transfer, Multi-step Transfer takes place. For more information, contact  
your service representative.  
4
❒ You can edit boxes in the same way you program them.  
❒ If you delete a destination specified as a reception destination using the  
destination list, the settings of the reception destination are also deleted, so  
they must be registered again. When a destination is changed, a document  
is transmitted to the new destination. If there is no destination of the spec-  
ified type, you can set which destination to be used as an alternative desti-  
nation. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).  
Reference  
p.152 “Parameter Settings”  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
Deleting Transfer Boxes  
This section describes how to delete Transfer Boxes.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [General Features].  
C Press [Box Setting].  
D Press [Delete], and then select the box you want to delete.  
183  
     
Facsimile Features  
E If the password is programmed, enter a password using the number keys,  
and then press [OK].  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.  
4
F Press [Delete].  
To cancel deleting a special sender, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns  
to that of step .  
D
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Printing the Box List  
Print a list showing the currently programmed Personal Boxes, Information Boxes,  
and Transfer Boxes.  
A Press [Facsimile Features].  
B Press [General Features].  
C Press [Box Setting: Print List].  
D Press the {Start} key.  
After printing the list, you can then start from step .  
C
To cancel printing a list before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel] or the  
{Clear/Stop} key. The display returns to that of step .  
C
To cancel printing a list after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The  
display returns to that of step .  
C
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
184  
     
5. Printer Features  
This chapter describes user tools in the Printer Features menu. For details on  
how to access Printer Features, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".  
Test Print  
This section describes the user tools in the Test Print menu under Printer Fea-  
tures.  
❖ Multiple Lists  
You can print the configuration page and error log.  
❖ Configuration Page  
You can print the machine's current configuration values.  
❖ Error Log  
You can print error logs listing all errors that occurred during printing. The most  
recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added when there are  
30 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the oldest error  
belongs to one of the following types of print jobs, it is not deleted. Instead, it will  
be stored separately in error logs for each job type, up to a maximum of 30 for  
each log. You can check any of these print jobs for error log information.  
• Sample Print  
• Locked Print  
• Hold Print  
• Stored Print  
The records of Auto Job Cancel and jobs canceled manually from the control  
panel can be printed.  
❖ Menu List  
You can print a Menu List showing the machine's function menus.  
❖ PCL Config./Font Page  
You can print the current configuration and installed PCL font list.  
❖ PS Config./Font Page  
You can print the current configuration and installed PostScript font list.  
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is in-  
stalled.  
❖ PDF Config./Font Page  
You can print the current configuration and installed PDF font list.  
This menu can be selected only when the PostScript 3 unit is installed.  
❖ Hex Dump  
You can print in the Hex Dump mode.  
185  
     
Printer Features  
Printing the configuration page  
A Press [Printer Features].  
B Press [Configuration Page] on the [List / Test Print].  
The configuration page is printed.  
5
C Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Interpreting the configuration page  
❖ System Reference  
• Unit Number  
Displays the serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer.  
• Total Memory  
Displays the total amount of memory (SDRAM) installed on the printer.  
• Firmware Version  
• Printer  
Displays the version number of the printer firmware.  
• System  
Displays the version number of the system firmware.  
• Engine  
Displays the version number of the printer engine.  
• LCDC  
Displays the version number of the panel display.  
• NIB  
Displays the version number of the Network interface.  
• Device Connection  
This item(s) appears when the device option(s) is installed.  
• HDD: Font / Macro Download  
Displays the capacity of the hard disk drive.  
• Printer Language  
Displays the version number of the printer driver language.  
186  
     
Test Print  
• Connection Equipment  
Displays the installed optional equipments.  
❖ Paper Input  
Displays settings made under Tray Paper Settings menu.  
❖ System  
Displays settings made under the System menu.  
❖ PCL Menu  
Displays settings made under PCL Menu.  
❖ PS Menu  
Displays settings made under PS Menu.  
❖ PDF Menu  
Displays settings made under PDF Menu.  
❖ Host Interface  
Displays settings made under the Host Interface menu.  
5
When DHCP is active on the network, the actual IPv4 address, subnet mask  
and gateway address appear in parentheses on the configuration page.  
❖ Interface Information  
Displays the interface information.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
187  
Printer Features  
Maintenance  
This section describes the user tools in the Maintenance menu under Printer Fea-  
tures.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ List / Test Print Lock  
You can lock the [List / Test Print] menu.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Delete All Temporary Print Jobs  
You can delete all print jobs temporarily stored in the machine.  
❖ Delete All Stored Print Jobs  
You can delete all print jobs stored in the machine.  
5
❖ 4 Color Graphic Mode  
• Text Priority  
Use the optimum CMYK toner combination for text printing.  
• Photo Priority  
Use the optimum CMYK toner combination for photo printing.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
p.47 “System Settings”  
188  
   
System  
System  
This section describes the user tools in the System menu under Printer Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Print Error Report  
Select this to have an error report printed when a printer or memory error oc-  
curs.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Auto Continue  
You can select this to enable Auto Continue. When it is On, printing continues  
after a system error occurs.  
• Off  
• Immediate  
• 1 minute  
• 5 minutes  
• 10 minutes  
• 15 minutes  
5
❖ Memory Overflow  
Select this to have a memory overflow error report printed.  
• Do not Print  
• Error Information  
❖ Job Separation  
You can enable Job Separation.  
This menu can be selected only when a finisher (optional) is installed.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs  
You can select to automatically delete print jobs temporarily stored in the ma-  
chine.  
• On  
• Off  
If you select [On], you can set up to 200 hours for auto file deleting.  
❖ Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs  
You can select to automatically delete print jobs stored in the machine.  
• On: 3 day(s)  
• Off  
If you select [On], you can set up to 180 days for auto file deleting.  
189  
   
Printer Features  
❖ Initial Print Job List  
You can set the desired type of print job list that appears on the screen when  
you press [Print Jobs].  
• Complete List  
Displays the list of print jobs stored in the machine.  
• List Per User ID  
Displays the list of the User ID who stored a file in the machine.  
❖ Memory Usage  
You can select the amount of memory used in Font Priority or Frame Priority,  
according to paper size or resolution.  
• Font Priority  
This setting uses memory for registering fonts.  
• Frame Priority  
This setting uses frame memory for high speed printing.  
❖ Duplex  
5
You can select to have print on both sides of each page.  
• Off  
• Long Edge Bind  
• Short Edge Bind  
❖ Copies  
You can specify the number of print sets. This setting is disabled if the num-  
ber of pages to print has been specified with the printer driver or another  
command.  
The number of copies can be specified from 1 to 999 by increments of one.  
Default: 1  
❖ Blank Page Print  
You can select whether or not to print blank pages.  
• On  
• Off  
Pages that match one of the following conditions are identified as blank.  
• There are no images.  
• There are images but they are outside the printable area.  
• There are only blank characters.  
❖ Reserved Job Waiting Time  
You can specify how long the machine waits to receive a print job before allow-  
ing other functions such as the copier and scanner functions to interrupt it.  
• Long Wait  
• Medium Wait  
• Short Wait  
• In Reserved Job Order  
190  
System  
❖ Printer Language  
Specify the printer language.  
• Auto  
• PCL  
• PS  
• PDF  
This menu appears only when the PostScript 3 unit is installed.  
❖ Sub Paper Size  
You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper Size (A4, LT) feature.  
• Auto  
• Off  
❖ Page Size  
You can select the default paper size.  
• The paper size you can select is as follows:  
11×17, 81/2×14, 81/2×13, 81/2×11, 81/4×13, 8×13, 71/4×101/2, 51/2×81/2,  
41/8×91/2, 31/8×71/2, A3, A4, A5, A6, B4JIS, B5JIS, B6JIS, C5 Env, C6 Env,  
DL Env, 8K, 16K, Custom Size  
5
Default: Metric version: A4, Inch version: 81/2×11  
❖ Letterhead Setting  
You can rotate original images when printing.  
When printing, original images are always rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore,  
output might not be as expected when printing onto letterhead or preprinted pa-  
per requiring orientation. Using this function, you can specify image rotation.  
• Off  
When set to Off, original images are rotated by 180 degrees.  
• Auto Detect  
When set to Auto Detect, the machine detects a letterhead or preprinted  
paper automatically, and does not rotate the image.  
• On (Always)  
When set to On (Always), the machine does not rotate.  
This function reduces printing speed.  
❖ Bypass Tray Setting Priority  
Specify whether (Printer) Driver / Command or Machine Settings, has prior-  
ity for determining the paper size for the bypass tray.  
• Driver / Command  
• Machine Settings  
❖ Edge to Edge Print  
You can select whether or not to print on the entire sheet.  
• Off  
• On  
The 5 mm margin along the edges may not be printed properly.  
191  
Printer Features  
❖ Default Printer Language  
You can set the default printer language if the machine cannot find the printer  
language automatically.  
• PCL  
• PS  
• PDF  
This menu appears only when the PostScript 3 unit is installed.  
❖ Tray Switching  
You can set to switch the paper tray.  
• Off  
• On  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
"Loading paper", Troubleshooting  
5
192  
Host Interface  
Host Interface  
This section describes the user tools in the Host Interface menu under Printer  
Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ I/O Buffer  
You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change  
this setting.  
• 128KB  
• 256KB  
❖ I/O Timeout  
You can set how many seconds the machine should wait before ending a print  
job. If data from another port usually arrives in the middle of a print job, you  
should increase this timeout period.  
5
• 10 seconds  
• 15 second(s)  
• 20 seconds  
• 25 seconds  
• 60 seconds  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
193  
   
Printer Features  
PCL Menu  
This section describes the user tools in the PCL Menu under Printer Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Orientation  
You can set the page orientation.  
• Portrait  
• Landscape  
❖ Form Lines  
You can set the number of lines per page.  
The number of lines can be specified from 5 to 128 by increments of one.  
Default: Metric version: 64, Inch version: 60  
❖ Font Source  
You can set the storage location of the default font.  
5
• Resident  
• RAM  
• HDD  
• SD  
RAM, HDD and SD can be selected only when fonts have been downloaded  
to the machine.  
❖ Font Number  
You can set the ID of the default font you want to use.  
The number of font numbers can be specified from 0 to 63 by increments of  
one.  
The default setting is 0.  
❖ Point Size  
You can set the point size you want to use for the selected font.  
The number of point sizes can be specified from 4.00 to 999.75 by increments  
of 0.25.  
This setting is effective only with variable-space fonts.  
The default setting is 12.00.  
❖ Font Pitch  
You can set the number of characters per inch for the selected font.  
The number of characters per inch can be specified from 0.44 to 99.99 by in-  
crements of 0.01.  
This setting is effective only with fixed-space fonts.  
The default setting is 10.00 pitches.  
194  
   
PCL Menu  
❖ Symbol Set  
Specify the character set of the selected font. The available options are as fol-  
lows:  
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-TK, Win  
L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math-8, PS  
Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21, ISO 60,  
ISO 69, Win 3.0  
❖ Courier Font  
You can select a courier font type.  
• Regular  
• Dark  
❖ Extend A4 Width  
You can extend the printing area width (when printing on A4 sheet with  
PCL).  
• Off  
5
• On  
When the setting is On, the width will be 81/2 inches.  
❖ Append CR to LF  
When set to On, a carriage return will follow each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CR−LF,  
FF=CR−FF.  
• Off  
• On  
❖ Resolution  
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.  
• 300 dpi  
• 600 dpi (Fast)  
• 600 dpi (Standard)  
• 600 dpi (High Quality)  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
195  
Printer Features  
PS Menu  
This section describes the user tools in the PS Menu under Printer Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
This menu appears only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.  
❖ Data Format  
You can select a data format.  
• Binary Data  
• TBCP  
This setting is not effective when operating the machine with a parallel or  
EtherTalk connection.  
When operating the machine with a parallel connection, and also if the binary  
data is sent from the printer driver, the print job is canceled.  
When operating the machine with an Ethernet connection, the print job is can-  
celed under the following conditions:  
5
• The printer driver data format is TBCP, and the data format selected on the  
display panel is Binary Data.  
• The printer driver data format is binary, and the data format selected on  
the display panel is TBCP.  
❖ Resolution  
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.  
• 600 dpi (Fast)  
• 600 dpi (Standard)  
• 600 dpi (High Quality)  
❖ Color Setting  
You can make an RGB setting.  
• Off  
• Fine  
• Super Fine  
❖ Color Profile  
You can set the color profile.  
• Auto  
• Presentation  
• Solid Color  
• Photographic  
• User Setting  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
196  
   
PDF Menu  
PDF Menu  
This section describes the user tools in the PDF Menu under Printer Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Change PDF Password  
Set the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.  
• Current Password  
• New Password  
• Confirm New Password  
A password can be set using the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the pass-  
word information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set the  
password using this menu from the Control Panel.  
❖ PDF Group Password  
Set the group password already specified with DeskTopBinder.  
5
• Current Password  
• New Password  
• Confirm New Password  
A password can be set using the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the pass-  
word information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set the  
password using this menu from the Control Panel.  
❖ Resolution  
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.  
• 600 dpi (Fast)  
• 600 dpi (Standard)  
• 600 dpi (High Quality)  
❖ Color Setting  
You can make an RGB setting.  
• None  
• Fine  
• Super Fine  
197  
   
Printer Features  
❖ Color Profile  
You can set the color profile.  
• Auto  
• Presentation  
• Solid Color  
• Photographic  
• User Setting  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
5
198  
6. Scanner Features  
This chapter describes user tools in the Scanner Features menu. For details on  
how to access Scanner Features, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".  
General Settings  
This section describes the user tools in the General Settings menu under Scanner  
Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Switch Title  
Select the title to be shown on the destination list.  
❖ Update Delivery Server Destination List  
Press [Update Delivery Server Destination List] to update the receivers from the  
delivery server. To use this function, it is necessary to set [Delivery Option] to  
[On].  
❖ Search Destination  
Select a destination list to be used in "Search Destination".  
To search from LDAP server, it is necessary to register the LDAP server in  
[System Settings] and set [LDAP Search] to [On].  
❖ TWAIN Standby Time  
When the machine is being used to send e-mail or a file, or functioning as Doc-  
ument Server or a network delivery scanner, a scanning request to the machine  
as a TWAIN scanner will switch the machine to the network TWAIN scanner  
function. This setting determines the delay until the machine switches to the  
network TWAIN scanner function.  
• Off  
When [Off] is selected, the machine will switch to the network TWAIN  
scanner function at once.  
• On: 10 sec.  
When [On] is selected, you can enter the delay time with the number keys  
(3-30 seconds). The machine will switch to the network TWAIN scanner  
function when the time set here passes after the last key operation.  
❖ Destination List Display Priority 1  
Select a destination list to be displayed when the machine is in the initial state.  
You can select either [E-mail / Folder] or [Delivery Server].  
• E-mail / Folder  
• Delivery Server  
199  
     
Scanner Features  
❖ Destination List Display Priority 2  
In the machine’s address book, select which address book appears by default.  
You can select either [E-mail Address] or [Folder].  
• E-mail Address  
• Folder  
❖ Print & Delete Scanner Journal  
Up to 100 transmission/delivery results can be checked on this machine. If  
the stored transmission/ delivery results reach 100, select whether to print  
the delivery journal.  
• On  
The transmission/delivery journal is printed automatically. The printed  
journal is deleted.  
• Off  
Transmission/delivery results are deleted one by one as new results are  
stored.  
• Do not Print: Disable Send  
Transmission/delivery cannot be performed when the journal is full.  
When printed, all records are deleted after printing. When not printed,  
records over the limit are automatically deleted in succession from the oldest  
record.  
6
While the journal is being printed, files with the status waiting cannot be sent.  
❖ Print Scanner Journal  
The scanner journal is printed and deleted.  
❖ Delete Scanner Journal  
The scanner journal is deleted without being printed.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
200  
Scan Settings  
Scan Settings  
This section describes the user tools in the Scan Settings menu under Scanner  
Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ A.C.S. Sensitivity Level  
Sets the sensitivity level for judging color/black and white for scanning orig-  
inals when [Scan Type] is set to [Auto Color Select].  
❖ Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass  
To divide originals and scanning them individually with the exposure glass  
to form a single file, select [Continuous Wait], [Off], or [Set Wait Time] for the wait-  
ing status.  
• Continuous Wait  
• Off  
• Set Wait Time: 60 sec.  
If you select [SADF] in [Original Feed Type] on the Scan to Folder screen, the [Wait  
Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] setting becomes invalid.  
If you select [Batch] in [Original Feed Type] on the Scan to Folder screen, the  
[Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] setting becomes invalid, and the ma-  
chine waits for an additional original to be placed.  
6
If [Set Wait Time] is selected, enter the wait time in seconds (3-999) for placing  
additional originals with the number keys. Scanning will start if additional  
originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed within this time. You can  
end scanning and begin transmission by pressing the {q} key within this  
time. Once the specified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.  
If [Continuous Wait] is selected, the machine will wait for additional originals  
until the {q} key is pressed. Scanning will start when additional originals  
are placed and the {Start} key is pressed. You can end scanning and begin  
sending by pressing the {q} key.  
If originals are placed in the ADF (auto document feeder), transmission will  
start without waiting for additional originals after all originals in the ADF  
have been scanned, regardless of the specified settings.  
If a paper misfeed occurs or any of the following operations are performed  
while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops  
and does not start again until the {q} key is pressed.  
• Changing the settings such as the scan settings  
• Opening the upper cover of the ADF  
• Pressing the {Interrupt} key to activate the copy mode  
201  
   
Scanner Features  
❖ Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF  
When dividing originals and scanning them separately with the ADF to form  
a single file, select [Set Wait Time] or [Continuous Wait] for the waiting status.  
• Continuous Wait  
• Set Wait Time: 60 sec.  
This setting is valid if [SADF] is specified for [Original Feed Type] when scan-  
ning.  
If [Set Wait Time] is selected, enter the wait time in seconds (3-999) for placing  
additional originals with the number keys. Scanning will start automatically  
if additional originals are placed within this time. You can end scanning and  
begin transmission by pressing the {q} key within this time. Once the spec-  
ified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.  
If [Continuous Wait] is selected, the machine will wait for the additional origi-  
nals until the {q} key is pressed. Scanning will start when additional origi-  
nals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed. You can end scanning and begin  
sending by pressing the {q} key.  
Even if originals are placed on the exposure glass, the machine will operate  
according to the specified settings. However, every time originals are placed  
on the exposure glass, you must press the {Start} key to start scanning. Scan-  
ning will start if additional originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed  
within this time. You can end scanning and begin transmission by pressing  
the {q} key within this time. Once the specified time has elapsed, transmis-  
sion starts automatically.  
6
If originals are placed in the auto document feeder (ADF), transmission will  
start without waiting for additional originals after all originals in the ADF  
have been scanned, regardless of the specified settings.  
If a paper misfeed occurs or any of the following operations are performed  
while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops  
and does not start again until the {q} key is pressed.  
• Changing the settings such as the scan settings  
• Opening the upper cover of the ADF  
• Pressing the {Interrupt} key to activate the copy mode  
❖ Background Density of ADS (Full Color)  
Characteristics due to the type of paper such as nonwhiteness like newspaper  
or transparent originals can be reduced by correcting the scanning density.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
"Batch, SADF", Scanner Reference  
"Items for Specifying Scan Settings", Scanner Reference  
"Setting Items for Original Feed Type", Scanner Reference  
"Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File", Scanner Reference  
202  
Send Settings  
Send Settings  
This section describes the user tools in the Send Settings menu under Scanner  
Features.  
Default settings are shown in bold type.  
❖ Compression (Black & White)  
Select whether or not to compress black and white scan files.  
• On  
• Off  
Compression reduces the time required for transferring the scan file.  
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size  
and network load.  
❖ Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)  
Specify whether or not to compress multi-level (grayscale / full color) scan  
files.  
• On  
• Off  
6
If you select [On], you can specify the compression level between one and five.  
The image quality is better for lower compression, but the time required for  
file transfer increases accordingly.  
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size  
and network load.  
❖ High Compression PDF Level  
Select compression level when creating high compression PDF files.  
• Higher  
• Standard  
❖ Max. E-mail Size  
Select whether or not to limit the size of an e-mail to which an image is at-  
tached.  
• On  
• Off  
When [On] is selected, enter the size limit (128-102400 KB) with the number  
keys.  
When the SMTP limits the size, match that setting.  
203  
   
Scanner Features  
❖ Divide & Send E-mail  
This function is effective only when [On] is selected for [Max. E-mail Size].  
Select whether or not an image exceeding the size specified in [Max. E-mail Size]  
should be divided and sent using more than one e-mail.  
• Yes (per Max. Size)  
• Yes (per Page)  
• Off  
When [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, enter the Max. Number of Divisions (2-  
500) with the number keys.  
When [Multi-page: TIFF] or [Multi-page: PDF] is selected for [File Type], the image  
will not be divided even if [Yes (per Page)] is selected.  
When [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, some received files may not be able to be  
restored, depending on the type of e-mail software.  
When [No] is selected, the e-mail is not sent if its size exceeds the limit, and an  
error message appears. The scan file is discarded.  
Set the maximum e-mail size within the capacity of the SMTP server.  
❖ E-mail Information Language  
Select the language in which e-mail information such as title, document  
name, and sender's name is sent.  
Select one of the following 20 languages:  
6
British English, American English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,  
Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Swedish, Finnish, Hungarian, Norwegian, Dan-  
ish, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Russian, and Hangul.  
The e-mail text which is a template cannot be changed.  
❖ No. of Digits for Single Page Files  
Sets digit number for serial number to attach to Single Page file name.  
• 4 Digits  
• 8 Digits  
❖ Stored File E-mail Method  
Specify the e-mail setting for sending stored files. You can select [Send File] or  
[Send URL Link]. This setting can be used for the following:  
• Send File  
Sending Stored Files by E-mail  
• Send URL Link  
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail  
If you select [Send File], actual files are attached to e-mails.  
If you select [Send URL Link], URL Links to file locations are attached to e-  
mails.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
204  
7. Registering Addresses and Users  
for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
This chapter describes how to register destinations and users in the Address  
Book. For details on how to access System Settings, see "Accessing User Tools  
(System Settings)".  
Address Book  
Registering information such as the names of users and their e-mail addresses in  
the Address Book allows you to manage them easily.  
Important  
❒ Address Book data is stored on the hard disk. It can be lost if there is some  
kind of hard disk failure. The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any  
damages resulting data loss.  
You can register and manage the following items in the Address Book:  
❖ Names  
You can register the name of the user and the key display. This is the basic in-  
formation required for managing user of the machine.  
To register a fax number or e-mail address in the address book, you must reg-  
ister information such as the user name and destination name in advance.  
❖ Auth. Info  
You can register user codes in order to restrict particular functions to certain  
users, and to check their use of each function. You can also register login user  
names and login passwords to be used when sending e-mail, sending to fold-  
ers, or accessing an LDAP server.  
205  
     
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
❖ Protection  
You can set protection codes to stop sender's name from being used or folders  
from being accessed without authorization.  
❖ Fax Dest.  
You can register fax numbers, line, fax header and select label insertion.  
When using IP-Fax, you can register the IP-Fax destination and select the pro-  
tocol.  
7
❖ E-mail  
You can register e-mail destinations in the Address Book.  
206  
Address Book  
❖ Folder  
You can register the protocol, path name and server name.  
• SMB  
• FTP  
• NCP  
7
❖ Add to Group  
You can put registered e-mail and folder destinations into a group for easier  
management.  
207  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Note  
❒ You can also use a Web Image Monitor to register names in the Address Book.  
With the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can register multiple names at  
the same time. For details about using Web Image Monitor, see the Web Im-  
age Monitor Help.  
❒ Using [Address Management Tool] in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can  
backup Address Book data. We recommend backing up data when using the  
Address Book. For operating instructions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-  
min Help.  
Managing names in the Address Book  
By registering a name and key display beforehand, you can specify e-mail and  
folder destinations simply by selecting the name key.  
Reference  
p.210 “Registering Names”  
Sending fax by Quick Dial  
Register a fax number in the Address Book so you can specify it only by selecting  
the fax destination, shown on the fax initial display when sending a fax. When  
label insertion is set to "On", the receiver's name and standard messages are  
printed on the fax message when it is received at the other end.  
7
By registering IP-Fax destinations in the Address Book, you can specify a desti-  
nation simply by selecting it from the destinations that appear in the initial fax  
display. Registered IP-Fax numbers can be used and printed as sender’s IP-Fax  
numbers.  
Reference  
p.223 “Fax Destination”  
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial  
By registering e-mail addresses in the Address Book, you can specify e-mail des-  
tinations simply by selecting them from the fax initial display when sending a  
document by Internet fax.  
You can also specify an e-mail address by selecting the destination shown on the  
initial scanner display when sending a document using the scanner function. A  
registered e-mail address can be used as the sender's address, and the sender's  
addresses are automatically entered in the "From" field of an e-mail header.  
Reference  
p.236 “E-mail Destination”  
208  
     
Address Book  
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly  
After registering the path name, user name and password, you can connect to a  
shared folder simply by selecting the destination shown on the initial scanner  
display whenever sending files using the scanner function to a shared folder.  
To share the folder using Windows, select the SMB protocol.  
To register the folder to the FTP server, select the FTP protocol.  
To register the folder to the NetWare server, select the NCP protocol.  
Reference  
p.240 “Registering Folders”  
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine  
After registering a protection code, you can specify the object of protection to  
prevent an e-mail destination from being used without permission.  
You can prevent unauthorized access to registered folders.  
Reference  
p.267 “Registering a Protection Code”  
Managing users and machine usage  
7
Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use  
of each function:  
• Copier  
• Document Server  
• Facsimile  
• Scanner  
• Printer  
Reference  
p.214 “Authentication Information”  
209  
     
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Registering Names  
Register user information including their names.  
The user name is useful for selecting a destination when sending faxes or e-mail.  
You can also use it as a folder destination.  
You can register up to 2000 names.  
Registering Names  
This section describes how to register names.  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Press [New Program].  
F Press [Change] on the right of the Name.  
The name entry display appears.  
G Enter the name, and then press [OK].  
210  
         
Registering Names  
H Press the key for the classification you want to use under Select Title.  
The keys you can select are as follows:  
• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.  
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added  
to the list of items in the selected title.  
You can select [Frequent] and one more page for each title.  
I Press [OK] twice.  
J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ The name can be used for documents in the Document Server. For details  
about the Document Server, see "Using the Document Server", Copy/ Doc-  
ument Server Reference.  
7
Reference  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
"Using the Document Server", Copy/ Document Server Reference  
211  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Changing a Registered Name  
This section describes how to change a name.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the registered name you want to change.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
7
F To change the name or key display, press [Change] on the right of the name  
or key display.  
G Enter the name or key display, and then press [OK].  
H To change the title, press the key for the classification you want to use from  
Select Title.  
I To change the registration number, press [Change] under Registration No..  
J {Eqnte}rkaenye. w registration number using the number keys, and then press the  
K Press [OK].  
L Press [Exit].  
M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail  
address, or IP-Fax destination.  
Reference  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
212  
     
Registering Names  
Deleting a Registered Name  
This section describes how to delete a name.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Press [Delete].  
E Select the name you want to delete.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
7
F Press [Yes].  
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
213  
     
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Authentication Information  
Following describes the procedure for authenticating a user code.  
Important  
❒ The functions associated with each user code are the same. If you change or  
delete user codes, management data and limits associated with that code be-  
come invalid.  
Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use  
of each function:  
Copier  
Document Server  
Facsimile  
Scanner  
Printer  
Note  
❒ You can register up to 500 user codes.  
❒ The number of copies made of documents stored in the Document Server us-  
ing the facsimile function is counted for each user code. This allows you to  
check each user's usage.  
❒ The number of copies scanned using the scanner function is counted for each  
7
user code. This allows you to check each user's usage.  
❒ To automatically register the printer driver user code, select [Printer: PC Con-  
trol] for the printer in User Code Authentication. To use the user code set in  
User Tools, set the user codes registered in User Tools for the printer driver.  
❒ For details about setting user codes for the printer driver, see Printer Driver  
Help.  
Reference  
p.81 “User Authentication Management”  
214  
     
Authentication Information  
Registering a User Code  
This section describes how to register a user code.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Press the name whose code is to be registered, or enter the registered num-  
ber using the number key.  
7
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Auth. Info].  
G Enter the user code using the number keys, and then press {q} key.  
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key.  
H Press [TNext] twice.  
215  
     
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
I Select the functions to be used with the user code from Available Functions.  
J Press [OK].  
K Press [Exit].  
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ You can enter a one-to eight-digit user code.  
❒ To register the name, see Registering Names".  
Reference  
p.210 “Registering Names”  
7
Changing a User Code  
This section describes how to change a user code.  
Important  
❒ Even if you change a user code, the counter value will not be cleared.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
216  
   
Authentication Information  
E Select the user whose user code you want to change.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Auth. Info].  
G Press [Change], and then enter the new user code using the number keys  
H Press {q} key.  
I To change the available functions, press [Auth. Info] and then press [TNext]  
twice.  
J Press the key to select the functions to enable them.  
7
Press the key to highlight it, and then the function is enabled. To cancel a selec-  
tion, press the highlighted key.  
K Press [OK].  
L Press [Exit].  
M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”  
217  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Deleting a User Code  
This section describes how to delete a user code.  
Important  
❒ After clearing the user code, the counter is automatically cleared.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Press [Delete].  
7
E Select the name whose code is to be deleted.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Auth. Info].  
G Press [Change] to delete the user code, and then press {q} key.  
H Press [OK].  
I Press [Exit].  
218  
   
Authentication Information  
J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ To delete a name from the Address Book entirely, see "Deleting a Registered  
Name".  
Reference  
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”  
Displaying the Counter for Each User  
This section describes how to display the counter for each user.  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Display / Clear / Print Counter per User].  
D Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print  
Counter], [Fax Counter] or [Scanner Counter].  
Counters for individual function usage under each user code appear.  
Printing the Counter for Each User  
This section describes how to print the counter for each user.  
A Press [System Settings].  
219  
       
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Display / Clear / Print Counter per User].  
D Select a user code from the left side of the display.  
Press [Select All on the Page] to select all user codes on the page.  
E Press [Print Counter List] under Per User.  
7
Enter the user code, and then press {q} if the user code is registered.  
F Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print  
Counter], [Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].  
G Press [Print].  
220  
Authentication Information  
Printing the Counter for All Users  
This section describes how to print the counter for all users.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Display / Clear / Print Counter per User].  
D Press [Print Counter List] under All Users.  
7
Enter the user code, and then press {q} if the user code is registered.  
E Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print  
Counter], [Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].  
F Press [Print].  
221  
   
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Clearing the Number of Prints  
This section describes how to clear the counter.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Display / Clear / Print Counter per User].  
D Select the user code to clear.  
E To clear the number of prints made under a user code, select the user code  
from the left side of the display.  
7
Press [Select All on the Page] to select all user codes on the page.  
F Press [Clear] under Per User.  
G Select the function usage you want to clear from [Copier Counter], [Print  
Counter],[Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].  
H Press [OK].  
I To clear the number of prints for all user codes, press [Clear] under All Users.  
J Select the function usage you want to clear from [Copier Counter], [Print  
Counter],[Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].  
K Press [OK].  
222  
   
Fax Destination  
Fax Destination  
Register a fax destination so you do not need to enter fax numbers each time, and  
can send documents that have been scanned in using the facsimile function.  
• It is easy to select the fax destination if you register "Name" and "Key Display"  
for the fax destination.  
• You can register fax destinations as a group. For details about registering a  
group, see "Registering Names to a Group".  
• You can register fax destinations by selecting them from redial function.  
• Registered Fax numbers can be used as sender's Fax numbers.  
There are two types of fax destination, as shown below:  
• Fax Destination  
Select this to send the fax over the telephone network.  
• IP-Fax  
Select this to send the fax to a machine on a TCP/IP network.  
You cannot send the fax to a machine on another network if that network is  
behind a firewall.  
You can program the following items in a fax destination:  
❖ Fax number  
Registers the destination's fax number. You can enter a fax number using up  
to 128 digits. You must include every digit in the number.  
7
❖ SUB Code  
Registering a SUB Code allows you to use Confidential Transmission to send  
messages to the other fax machines which support a similar function called  
"SUB Code". See "SUB Code", Facsimile Reference.  
❖ SEP Code  
Registering a SEP Code allows you to use Polling Reception to receive faxes  
from the other fax machines which support Polling Reception. See "SEP  
Code", Facsimile Reference.  
❖ Line  
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, you can select the line type  
per destination.  
❖ International TX mode  
When setting the International TX mode to [On], the machine transmits more  
carefully by lowering transmission speed. However, communication times  
increase.  
❖ Fax header  
You can select to print a fax header on fax messages the other party receives.  
The default is "1st Name".  
223  
     
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
❖ Label insertion  
Use label insertion to print information such as the destination name on the  
sheet printed out at the destination.  
Data is printed as follows:  
• Destination Name  
The destination name specified in [Fax Destination] is printed with "To" be-  
fore it at the top of the sheet.  
• Standard Message  
A registered two-line sentence is printed under "Destination Name".  
To use this function, set Label Insertion to [On] when programming fax desti-  
nations and also press [Label Insertion] when sending fax documents.  
Fax header and label insertion are also printed when sending by e-mail using  
the fax function.  
You can program a standard message other than those registered in the ma-  
chine. See "Programming, Changing, and Deleting Standard Messages", Fac-  
simile Reference  
You can program the following items in an IP-Fax Destination:  
❖ IP-Fax  
Register the IP-Fax destination. You can register the name using up to 128  
characters. You must make this setting when using IP-Fax.  
This setting only works if the IP-Fax function has been selected.  
❖ SUB Code  
7
Registering a SUB Code allows you to use Confidential Transmission to send  
messages to the other fax machines which support a similar function called  
"SUB Code". See "SUB Code", Facsimile Reference.  
❖ SEP Code  
Registering a SEP Code allows you to use Polling Reception to receive faxes  
from the other fax machines which support Polling Reception. See "SEP  
Code", Facsimile Reference.  
❖ Select Protocol  
Select the protocol for the IP-Fax transmission.  
This setting only works if the IP-Fax function has been selected.  
Reference  
p.257 “Registering Names to a Group”  
p.267 “Registering a Protection Code”  
224  
Fax Destination  
Fax Destination  
This section describes how to register a fax number.  
Registering a Fax Destination  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
7
E Select the name whose fax destination you want to register. Press the name  
key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
F Press [Fax Dest.].  
G Enter the fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK] under  
Facsimile No..  
H Specify optional settings such as "SUB Code", "SEP Code", and "Interna-  
tional TX mode".  
225  
       
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
I Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ When a group is registered, you can also add this fax destination to the group.  
For details about registering groups, see "Registering Names to a Group".  
❒ To register the name, see "Registering Names".  
Reference  
p.210 “Registering Names”  
p.227 “Using a Fax Destination as a sender”  
p.227 “To change the line”  
p.228 “To change the SUB Code”  
p.228 “To change the SEP Code”  
p.228 “To set the International TX Mode”  
p.228 “To select the fax header”  
p.229 “To set label insertion”  
p.258 “Registering Names to a Group”  
Changing a Fax Destination  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name whose fax destination you want to change.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Fax Dest.].  
G Change the settings.  
226  
 
Fax Destination  
H Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”  
p.227 “To change the fax number”  
p.227 “To change the line”  
p.228 “To change the SUB Code”  
p.228 “To change the SEP Code”  
p.228 “To set the International TX Mode”  
p.228 “To select the fax header”  
p.229 “To set label insertion”  
Using a Fax Destination as a sender  
A Press [Protection].  
B Press [Sender] on the right side of Use Name as.  
To change the fax number  
7
A Press [Change]under Facsimile No..  
B Enter the new fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK].  
To change the line  
A Press [Select Line].  
B Select the line, and then press [OK].  
227  
         
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
To change the SUB Code  
A Press [Adv. Features], and then press [SUB Code].  
B Press [Change] under TX SUB Code.  
C Enter the new SUB Code, and then press [OK].  
D To change the password, press [Change] under Password (SID).  
E Enter the new password, and then press [OK].  
F Press [OK].  
To change the SEP Code  
A Press [Adv. Features], and then press [SEP Code].  
B Press [Change] under RX SEP Code.  
C Enter the new SEP Code, and then press [OK].  
D To change the password, press [Change] under Password (PWD).  
E Enter the new password, and then press [OK].  
F Press [OK].  
7
To set the International TX Mode  
A Press [Change] under International TX Mode.  
B Select [Off] or [On], and then press [OK].  
To select the fax header  
You can register the fax header in Program Fax Information in the system set-  
tings for Facsimile Features.  
A Press [Change] under Fax Header.  
B Select [1st Name] or [2nd Name], and then press [OK].  
Reference  
p.144 “Registering Fax Information”  
228  
       
Fax Destination  
To set label insertion  
When Label Insertion is set to ON, the receiver's name and standard messages  
are printed on the fax message when it is received at the other end.  
A Press [Change] under Label Insertion.  
B Press [On].  
C Press [Change] under Line 2.  
D Select the new standard message or press [Manual Entry] to enter the new  
message.  
E Enter the new message, and then press [OK].  
F Press [OK].  
G Press [Change] under Line 3.  
H Select the new standard message, and then press [OK].  
I Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered  
Name".  
7
Reference  
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”  
Deleting a Fax Destination  
Important  
❒ If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to  
its registered Personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check  
the settings in the fax function before deleting any destinations.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
229  
   
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Press [Delete].  
E Select the name whose fax destination you want to delete.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Fax Dest.].  
G Press [Change] under Facsimile No..  
H Press [Delete All].  
7
I Press [OK] twice.  
J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ To delete the name, key display, and title, see "Deleting a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”  
230  
Fax Destination  
IP-Fax Destination  
This section describes how to register a IP-Fax destination.  
Note  
❒ For details about sending an IP-Fax, "Sending by IP-Fax", Facsimile Reference.  
Reference  
"Sending by IP-Fax", Facsimile Reference  
Registering an IP-Fax Destination  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name whose IP-Fax destination you want to register.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
F Press [Fax Dest.].  
G Press [Select Line], and then select [H.323] or [SIP].  
H Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".  
231  
 
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
I Enter the IP-Fax destination.  
J Press [OK] twice.  
Note  
❒ To register the name, see Registering Names".  
Reference  
p.210 “Registering Names”  
p.215 “Registering a User Code”  
p.257 “Registering Names to a Group”  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
Changing a Registered IP-Fax Destination  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name whose IP-Fax destination you want to change.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Fax Dest.].  
232  
Fax Destination  
G Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".  
H Enter the new destination, and then press [OK].  
I Press [OK].  
J Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
7
Using the IP–Fax Destination as the sender  
A Press [Protection].  
B Press [Sender] under [Use Name as].  
To change the IP-Fax Destination  
A Press [Change] under [Use Name as].  
B Enter the new destination, and then press [OK].  
To select the protocol  
A Press [Select Line].  
B Select [H.323] or [SIP].  
233  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
To program the SUB Code  
A Press [Adv. Features], and then press [SUB Code].  
B Press [Change] under TX SUB Code.  
C Enter the SUB Code, and then press [OK].  
D To enter a password, press [Change] under Password (SID).  
E Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].  
F Press [OK].  
To program the SEP Code  
A Press [Adv. Features], and then press [SUB Code].  
B Press [Change] under RX SEP Code.  
C Enter a SEP Code using the number keys, and then press [OK].  
D To enter a password, press [Change] under Password (PWD).  
E Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].  
F Press [OK].  
7
To set the International TX Mode  
A Press [Change] under International TX Mode.  
B Select [Off] or [On], and then press [OK].  
To select the fax header  
A Press [Change] under Fax Header.  
B Select [1st Name] or [2nd Name], and then press [OK].  
234  
Fax Destination  
Deleting a Registered IP-Fax Destination  
If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to its  
registered Personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check the  
settings in the fax function before deleting any destinations.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Press [Delete].  
E Select the name whose IP-Fax destination you want to delete. Press the  
7
name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Fax Dest.].  
G Press [Change] under "Fax Destination".  
H Press [Delete All].  
I Press [OK] twice.  
J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”  
235  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
E-mail Destination  
Register e-mail destinations so you do not need to enter an e-mail address every  
time, and can send scan files from scanner or fax function by e-mail.  
• It is easy to select the e-mail destination if you register "Name" and "Key Dis-  
play" as the e-mail destination.  
• You can register e-mail destinations as a group.  
• You can use the e-mail address as the sender's address when sending scan  
files in scanner mode. If you want to do this, set a protection code on the send-  
er address to prevent unauthorized access.  
Note  
❒ You can select an e-mail address from an LDAP server, and then register it in  
the Address Book. See "Sending Scan File by E-mail", Scanner Reference.  
❒ You can set the machine to send a Transmission Result Report by e-mail  
whenever a transmission is sent. See Facsimile Reference You can set the ma-  
chine to send a Transmission Result Report by e-mail whenever a transmis-  
sion is sent. See Facsimile Reference.  
Reference  
p.267 “Registering a Protection Code”  
7
Registering an E-mail Destination  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to register. Press the name  
key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
F Press [E-mail].  
236  
         
E-mail Destination  
G Press [Change].  
H Enter the e-mail address.  
7
I Press [OK].  
J Select [E-mail / Internet Fax Destination] or [Internet Fax Destination Only].  
K If you want to use Internet fax, specify whether or not to use " Send via SMTP  
Server".  
L Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ You can enter up to 128 characters for the e-mail address.  
❒ To register the name, see Registering Names".  
Reference  
p.210 “Registering Names”  
p.215 “Registering a User Code”  
p.258 “Registering Names to a Group”  
237  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Changing an E-mail Destination  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to change.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
7
F Press [E-mail].  
G Press [Change] under E-mail Address.  
H Enter the e-mail address, and then press [OK].  
I Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
238  
   
E-mail Destination  
Using the e-mail address as the sender  
A Press [Protection].  
B Press [Sender] under [Use Name as].  
Deleting an E-mail Destination  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Press [Delete].  
7
E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to delete.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [E-mail].  
G Press [Change] under E-mail Address.  
H Press [Delete All].  
I Press [OK] twice.  
J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ To delete the name, key display, and title, see "Deleting a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”  
239  
   
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Registering Folders  
By registering a shared folder, you can send scan files to it directly.  
There are three types of protocol you can use:  
• SMB  
For sending files to shared Windows folders.  
• FTP  
Use when sending files to an FTP server.  
• NCP  
Use when sending files to an Net- Ware server.  
Note  
❒ For details about protocols, server names, and folder levels, consult your net-  
work administrator.  
❒ You can prevent unauthorized users from accessing folders from the ma-  
chine. See "Registering a Protection Code".  
❒ You can only select either SMB, FTP, or NCP. If you change protocol after fin-  
ishing your settings, all previous entries are cleared.  
Using SMB to Connect  
7
Note  
❒ To register a folder in an FTP server, see "Using FTP to Connect".  
❒ To register a folder in an NetWare server, see "Using NCP to Connect".  
Reference  
p.246 “Using FTP to Connect”  
p.251 “Using NCP to Connect”  
Registering an SMB Folder  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
240  
               
Registering Folders  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name whose folder you want to register. Press the name key, or  
enter the registered number using the number keys.  
F Press [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].  
G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of Folder Authentication.  
H Press [Change] under Login User Name.  
I Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].  
J Press [Change] under Login Password.  
K Enter the password, and then press [OK].  
L Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].  
M Press [Folder].  
7
N Press [SMB].  
O Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.  
P Press [Exit].  
Q Press [OK].  
241  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
R Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ To register the name, see Registering Names".  
❒ You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name.  
❒ You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.  
❒ You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.  
❒ To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the  
folder by browsing the network.  
❒ If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.  
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected, the SMB User Name and SMB Password  
that you have specified in Default User Name / Password (Send) of File  
Transfer settings applies.  
❒ If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.  
Reference  
p.210 “Registering Names”  
p.242 “To locate the SMB folder manually”  
p.243 “To locate the SMB folder using Browse Network”  
To locate the SMB folder manually  
7
A Press [Change] under Path.  
B Enter the path where the folder is located.  
C Press [OK].  
If the format of the entered path is not correct, a message appears. Press [Exit],  
and then enter the path again.  
Note  
❒ Enter the path using this format: "\\ServerName\Share- Name\PathName".  
❒ You can also enter an IPv4 address.  
❒ You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.  
242  
 
Registering Folders  
To locate the SMB folder using Browse Network  
A Press [Browse Network].  
The client computers sharing the same network as the machine appear.  
Network display only lists client computers you are authorized to access.  
B Select a client computer.  
Shared folders under it appear.  
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.  
C Select the folder you want to register.  
D [OK].  
7
If a Login Screen Appears  
This section explains how to log on to the machine if the login screen appears  
when you try to access a folder by browsing the network.  
If you have not specified folder authentication, or if an incorrect user name or  
password has been entered for folder authentication, the login screen appears.  
A Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].  
Enter the login user name specified for folder authentication.  
B Enter the password, and then press [OK].  
The path to the selected folder appears.  
If a message appears, press [Exit], and then enter the login user name and  
password again.  
243  
 
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Changing an SMB Folder  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name whose folder you want to change.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
7
F Press [Folder].  
G Select the items you want to change.  
When specifying a folder, enter the path directly or select it by referencing the  
network. For more information, see "To locate the folder manually" and "Us-  
ing Browse Network to locate the folder".  
H Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.  
I Press [OK].  
J Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”  
244  
 
Registering Folders  
To change the protocol  
A Press [FTP] or [NCP].  
B A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].  
Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.  
C Enter each item again.  
Reference  
p.246 “Registering an FTP Folder”  
Deleting an SMB registered folder  
7
A [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Press [Delete].  
E Select the name whose folder you want to delete.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Folder].  
245  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
G Press the protocol which is not currently selected.  
A confirmation message appears.  
H Press [Yes].  
I Press [OK].  
J Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ To delete the name, key display, and title, see "Deleting a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”  
Using FTP to Connect  
Note  
❒ To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see "Using SMB to Connect".  
❒ To register a folder in an NetWare server, see "Using NCP to Connect".  
Reference  
p.240 “Using SMB to Connect”  
7
p.251 “Using NCP to Connect”  
Registering an FTP Folder  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name whose folder you want to register.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
246  
       
Registering Folders  
F Press [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].  
G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of Folder Authentication.  
H Press [Change] under Login User Name.  
I Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].  
J Press [Change] under Login Password.  
K Enter the password, and then press [OK].  
L Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].  
M Press [Folder].  
N Press [FTP].  
7
O Press [Change] under Server Name.  
P Enter the server name, and then press [OK].  
Q Press [Change] under Path.  
R Enter the path.  
S Press [OK].  
T Press [Change] under "Port No."  
U Enter Port No..  
V Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.  
W Press [Exit].  
X Press [OK].  
247  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Y Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ To register the name, see Registering Names".  
❒ You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name.  
❒ You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.  
❒ You can enter a server name using up to 64 characters.  
❒ You can enter an absolute path, using this format: "/user/ home/user-  
name"; or a relative path, using this format: "directory/sub-directory".  
❒ If you leave the path blank, the login directory is assumed to be the current  
working directory.  
❒ You can also enter an IPv4 address.  
❒ You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.  
❒ To change the port number, press [Change] under Port No.. Enter the port  
number using the number keys, and then press {q}.  
❒ You can enter 1 to 65535.  
❒ If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.  
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected, the FTP User Name and FTP Password  
that you have specified in Default User Name / Password (Send) of File  
Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".  
❒ If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.  
7
Reference  
p.210 “Registering Names”  
p.242 “To locate the SMB folder manually”  
p.243 “To locate the SMB folder using Browse Network”  
Changing an FTP Folder  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
248  
 
Registering Folders  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name whose folder you want to change, and then press [Folder].  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Folder].  
G Select the items you want to change.  
H Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.  
I Press [OK].  
J Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”  
To change the protocol  
7
A Press [SMB], or [NCP].  
B A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].  
Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.  
C Enter each item again.  
Reference  
p.240 “Registering an SMB Folder”  
249  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Changing items under FTP  
A Press [Change] under Port No.  
B Enter the new port number, and then press {q}.  
C Press [Change] under Server Name.  
D Enter the new server name, and then press [OK].  
E Press [Change] under "Path".  
F Enter the new path, and then press [OK].  
Deleting an FTP Folder  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Press [Delete].  
E Select the name whose folder you want to delete.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Folder].  
G Press the protocol which is not currently selected.  
A confirmation message appears.  
H Press [Yes].  
I Press [OK].  
250  
 
Registering Folders  
J Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ To delete a name entirely, see "Deleting a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”  
Using NCP to Connect  
Note  
❒ To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see "Using SMB to Connect"  
❒ To register a folder in an FTP server, see "Using FTP to Connect"  
Reference  
p.240 “Using SMB to Connect”  
p.246 “Using FTP to Connect”  
Registering an NCP Folder  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Press the name you want to register or enter the registered number using  
the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].  
G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of Folder Authentication.  
H Press [Change] under Login User Name.  
251  
     
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
I Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].  
J Press [Change] under Login Password.  
K Enter the password, and then press [OK].  
L Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].  
M Press [Folder].  
N Press [NCP].  
O Select "Connection Type".  
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to spec-  
ify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].  
P Specify the folder.  
Q Press [OK].  
R Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ To register the name, see Registering Names".  
❒ You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name.  
❒ You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.  
7
❒ If you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], enter the user name followed  
by the name of the context where the user object is located. If the user name  
is "user" and the context name is "context", enter "user.context"  
❒ To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the  
folder by browsing the network.  
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected, the NCP User Name and NCP Password  
that you have specified in Default User Name / Password (Send) of File  
Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".  
❒ If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.  
Reference  
p.210 “Registering Names”  
p.253 “To locate the NCP folder manually”  
p.253 “To locate the NCP folder using Browse Network”  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
252  
Registering Folders  
To locate the NCP folder manually  
A Press [Change] under Path.  
B Enter the path where the folder is located.  
C [OK].  
D Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.  
E Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ If you set "Connection Type" to [NDS], and if the NDS tree name is "tree",  
the name of the context including the volume is "context", the volume  
name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder", then the path will be  
"\\tree\volume. context\folder".  
❒ If you set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], and if the NetWare server name  
is "server", the volume name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder",  
then the path will be "\\server\volume\folder".  
❒ You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.  
❒ If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.  
To locate the NCP folder using Browse Network  
7
A Press [Browse Network].  
B If you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], a list of items in the NDS tree  
appears. If you have set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], a list of items on the  
NetWare server appears.  
C Search for the destination folder in the NDS tree or NetWare server.  
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.  
D Select the folder you want to register.  
E [OK].  
Note  
❒ Only the folders you are allowed to access appear in [Browse Network].  
❒ If the languages used on the machine and the destination you want to view  
differ, the items in the list may not appear correctly.  
❒ Up to 100 items can be displayed in the list.  
253  
   
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Changing an NCP registered folder  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the user of the registered folder you want to change.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
7
F Press [Folder].  
G Select "Connection Type".  
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to spec-  
ify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].  
H Specify the folder.  
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder  
by browsing the network.  
I Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.  
J Press [OK].  
K Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”  
254  
Registering Folders  
To change the protocol  
A Press [SMB], or [FTP].  
B A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].  
Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.  
C Enter each item again.  
Reference  
p.240 “Registering an SMB Folder”  
p.246 “Registering an FTP Folder”  
Deleting an NCP Folder  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Press [Delete].  
E Select a user of the folder you want to delete.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Folder].  
G Press the protocol which is not currently selected.  
A confirmation message appears.  
H Press [Yes].  
I Press [OK].  
255  
 
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
J [Exit].  
Note  
❒ To delete a name entirely, see Deleting a Registered Name".  
Reference  
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”  
7
256  
Registering Names to a Group  
Registering Names to a Group  
You can register names to a group to enable easy management of e-mail addresses  
and folders for each group.  
To add names to a group, the groups must be registered beforehand.  
Important  
❒ When using Scan to Folder function, you cannot send scan files to a group  
with over 50 folders registered.  
❒ The maximum number of destinations registerable to a group is 500.  
Note  
❒ You can set a protection code to prevent unauthorized access to the folders  
registered in a group. For details, see "Registering a Protection Code".  
Reference  
p.267 “Registering a Protection Code”  
Registering a Group  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Press [New Program].  
257  
       
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
F Press [Change] under Group Name.  
G Enter the group name, and then press [OK].  
The Key Display name is set automatically.  
H Press the title key under Select Title, if necessary.  
The keys you can select are as follows:  
• [Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.  
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]…  
Added to the list of items in the selected title.  
You can select [Frequent] and one more page for each title.  
I When you want to change the key display, press [Change] under Key Dis-  
7
play. Enter the key display, and then press [OK].  
J Press [OK].  
Reference  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
Registering Names to a Group  
You can put names that have been registered in the Address Book into a group.  
When registering new names, you can also register groups at the same time.  
A Press [System Settings].  
258  
     
Registering Names to a Group  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name to register in a group.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Add to Group].  
G Select a group to which you want to add the name to.  
7
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the name is  
added to it.  
H Press [OK].  
259  
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Adding a Group to Another Group  
You can add a group to another group.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the group that you want to put into another group.  
Press the group key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
7
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Add to Group].  
260  
 
Registering Names to a Group  
G Select the group which you want to add to.  
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the group is  
added to it.  
7
H Press [OK].  
Displaying Names Registered in a Group  
You can check the names or groups registered in each group.  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
261  
   
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
E Select the group where the members you want to check is registered.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Programmed User/Group].  
All the names registered will be displayed.  
G Press [OK].  
Removing a Name from a Group  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name to remove from a group.  
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Add to Group].  
262  
   
Registering Names to a Group  
G Select the group from which you want to remove the name.  
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the name is  
added to it.  
H Press [OK].  
7
Deleting a Group Within Another Group  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
263  
   
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
E Select the group that you want to delete from.  
Press the group key, or enter the registered number during the number keys.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Add to Group].  
The keys of groups in which the group is registered appear highlighted.  
G Select the group that you want to delete from.  
The group key is deselected and the group is deleted from it.  
H [OK].  
7
264  
Registering Names to a Group  
Changing a Group Name  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Press the group key you want to change.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
7
F To change the group name and key display, press [Change] under Group  
Name or Key Display.  
G Enter the new group name or key display, and then press [OK].  
H To change the title, press the title key under Select Title.  
I To change the registration number, press [Change] under Registration No..  
J Enter the new registration number using the number keys.  
K Press the {q} key.  
L Press [OK].  
265  
   
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Deleting a Group  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].  
D Press [Delete].  
E Press [Yes].  
F Press a group key you want to delete.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
7
G Press [Yes].  
266  
   
Registering a Protection Code  
Registering a Protection Code  
You can stop sender's names or folders being accessed by setting a protection  
code.  
You can use this function to protect the following:  
• Folders  
You can prevent unauthorized access to folders.  
• Sender's names  
You can prevent misuse of sender's names.  
Reference  
p.215 “Registering a User Code”  
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Select the name whose protection code you want to register.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
267  
       
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
F Press [Protection].  
G Press [Destination] or [Sender] under Use Name as.  
Both [Destination] and [Sender] can be selected at the same time.  
7
H Press [Change] under Protection Code.  
I Enter a protection code using the number keys, and then press {q}.  
J Press [OK].  
K Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ Specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify "Pro-  
tection" without specifying a protection code.  
268  
Registering a Protection Code  
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User  
A Press [System Settings].  
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Press the group key you want to register or enter the registered number us-  
ing the number keys.  
F Press [Protection].  
7
G Press [Folder Destination] under Protection Object.  
H Press [Change] under Protection Code.  
I Enter a protection code using the number keys, and then press the {q} key.  
J Press [OK].  
K Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ Specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify "Pro-  
tection" without specifying a protection code.  
269  
   
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication  
SMTP Authentication  
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name  
and login password to be used when accessing an SMTP server.  
To use an SMTP server, you need to program it beforehand.  
Important  
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected for SMTP Authentication, the User Name and  
Password that you have specified in SMTP Authentication of File Transfer  
settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
E Press the name you want to register or enter the registered number using  
the number keys  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
F Press [Auth. Info].  
G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of SMTP Authentication.  
270  
         
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication  
H Press [Change] under Login User Name.  
I Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].  
J Press [Change] under Login Password.  
K Enter the password, and then press [OK].  
L Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].  
M [OK].  
Note  
❒ To register the name, see Registering Names".  
❒ You can enter up to 191 characters for the user name.  
7
❒ When using POP before SMTP Authentication, you can enter up to 63 char-  
acters.  
❒ You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.  
❒ To change the SMTP Authentication settings, repeat step to .  
B
M
Reference  
p.210 “Registering Names”  
p.14 “Network Settings”  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
271  
 
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
LDAP Authentication  
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name  
and login password to be used when accessing an LDAP server.  
To use an LDAP server, you need to program it beforehand. For details, see  
"LDAP Server Settings", Network Guide.  
Important  
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name  
and Password that you have specified in Program / Change LDAP Server of  
Administrator Tools settings applies. For details, see "LDAP Server Settings".  
A Press [System Settings].  
7
B Press [Administrator Tools].  
C Press [Address Book Management].  
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.  
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,  
or IP-Fax destination.  
E Press the name you want to register or enter the registered number using  
the number keys.  
F Press [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].  
G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of LDAP Authentication.  
272  
     
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication  
H Press [Change] under Login User Name.  
I Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].  
J Press [Change] under Login Password.  
K Enter the password, and then press [OK].  
L Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].  
M Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ To register the name, see "Registering Names".  
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name  
and Password that you have specified in Program / Change LDAP Server  
of Administrator Tools settings applies.  
7
❒ You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.  
❒ To change the LDAP Authentication settings, repeat step to .  
B
M
Reference  
p.210 “Registering Names”  
"Entering Text", About This Machine  
273  
 
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions  
7
274  
8. Other User Tools  
Initial settings allow you switch the language as well as checking the number of  
printed papers by displaying the counter. For details on how to access respective  
settings, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".  
Maintenance  
This section describes the user tools in Maintenance.  
[Maintenance] allows color drift and gradient correction.  
❖ Auto Color Calibration  
If a certain color is strong or the color of the copy differs from the original, adjust  
the yellow, magenta, cyan and black balance.  
❖ Color Registration  
If the color documents show registration shifting, perform automatic color  
registration.  
Note  
❒ For details about "Auto Color Calibration" and "Color Registration", see "Mainte-  
nance", Troubleshooting.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
"Maintenance", Troubleshooting  
275  
         
Other User Tools  
Changing the Display Language  
You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.  
A Press [Español].  
The language is changed to Spanish.  
B Press [Salir].  
8
The menu appears in Spanish.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
276  
   
Inquiry  
Inquiry  
The inquiry function lets you check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs,  
or ordering consumables such as toner. Be sure to contact your service engineer  
to verify the following:  
❖ Consumables  
• Telephone No. to order  
• Toner  
• Staple  
• Staple (Center)  
• TX Stamp Name  
❖ Machine Maintenance/Repair  
• Telephone No.  
• Serial No. of Machine  
❖ Sales Representative  
• Telephone No.  
A Press [Inquiry].  
8
Inquiry information appears.  
B Press [Print Inquiry List].  
277  
   
Other User Tools  
C Press the {Start} key.  
Inquiry information prints out.  
D Press [Exit] twice.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
8
278  
Counter  
Counter  
Displaying the Total Counter  
You can display the total counter value used for all functions.  
A Press [Counter].  
B To print a counter list, press [Print Counter List].  
8
C Press the {Start} key.  
A counter list prints out.  
Reference  
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”  
279  
     
Other User Tools  
8
280  
9. Appendix  
Specifications for the Main Unit  
❖ Configuration:  
Desktop  
❖ Photosensitivity type:  
OPC drum  
❖ Original scanning:  
One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD  
❖ Copy process:  
Dry electrostatic transfer system  
❖ Development:  
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system  
❖ Fusing:  
Oilless belt fusing  
❖ Resolution:  
600 dpi  
❖ Exposure glass:  
Stationary original exposure type  
❖ Original reference position:  
Rear left corner  
❖ Warm-up time:  
Type 1: 25 seconds or less (23°C)  
Type 2: 29 seconds or less (23°C)  
❖ Originals:  
Sheet/book/objects  
❖ Maximum original size:  
A3L, 11"×17"L  
281  
     
Appendix  
❖ Copy paper size:  
• Trays: A3L-A5K, 11"×17"L-71/4"×101/2"L  
• Bypass:A3L-A6L, 11"×17"L-71/4"×101/2"L  
• Bypass (custom size): Vertical: 90.0-305.0mm, 3.55"-12.00" Horizontal:  
148.0-600.0mm, 5.83"-23.62"  
• Duplex: A3L-A5K, 11"×17"L-101/2"L  
• LCT: A4K, 81/2"×11"K  
❖ Paper weight:  
• Paper Tray: 60-216g/m2, 16-57lb.  
• Bypass: 60-253g/m2, 16-67lb.  
• Duplex: 64-169g/m2, 17-45lb.  
❖ Non-reproduction area:  
• Leading edge: 5±1mm  
• Trailing edge: 2±1mm  
• Left edge: 2±1mm  
• Right edge: 2±1mm  
❖ First copy time:  
• Type 1:  
• Color: 8 seconds or less  
• B&W: 4.9 seconds or less  
• Type 2:  
• Color: 7 seconds or less  
• B&W: 4.5 seconds or less  
9
❖ Copying speed: (Type 1) Full Color / B&W  
• 35/35 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2"×11"K)  
❖ Copying speed: (Type 2) Full Color / B&W  
• 40/45 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2"×11"K)  
282  
Specifications for the Main Unit  
❖ Reproduction ratio:  
Preset reproduction ratios:  
• Enlargement  
Metric version  
400%  
Inch version  
400%  
200%  
200%  
141%  
155%  
122%  
129%  
115%  
121%  
• Full size  
Metric version  
100%  
Inch version  
100%  
• Reduction  
Metric version  
93%  
Inch version  
93%  
82%  
85%  
75%  
78%  
71%  
73%  
65%  
65%  
50%  
50%  
25%  
25%  
Zoom: From 25 to 400% in increments of 1%  
9
❖ Maximum continuous copy run:  
999 sheets  
❖ Paper capacity:  
• Tray1,2: 550 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• Bypass tray: 100 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
283  
Appendix  
❖ Power consumption:  
Main unit only  
about 1.44 kW  
about 250W  
Complete system  
about 1.44 kW  
about 280 kW  
about 1.3 kW  
Warm-up  
Stand-by  
During printing  
Maximum  
about 1.2 kW  
about 1.44 kW  
about 1.44 kW  
The complete system consists of the main unit, booklet finisher, large capacity  
tray, file format converter, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface unit, and  
USB Host interface unit.  
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H up to exposure glass):  
670×670×760mm, 26.8"×26.8"×30.4"  
❖ Space for main unit (W × D):  
Type 1,2: 910×670mm, 36.4"×26.8"  
❖ Noise emission:  
Sound power level:  
• Main unit only  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Stand-by  
Copying  
less than 44 dB(A)  
less than 66 dB(A)  
less than 44 dB(A)  
less than 67 dB(A)  
• Complete system  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Stand-by  
Copying  
less than 45 dB(A)  
less than 71 dB(A)  
less than 45 dB(A)  
less than 71 dB(A)  
9
Sound pressure level:  
• Main unit only  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Stand-by  
Copying  
less than 32 dB(A)  
less than 52 dB(A)  
less than 32 dB(A)  
less than 53 dB(A)  
284  
Specifications for the Main Unit  
• Complete system  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Stand-by  
Copying  
less than 33 dB(A)  
less than 61 dB(A)  
less than 33 dB(A)  
less than 61 dB(A)  
• Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual values mea-  
sured in accordance with ISO 7779.  
• Sound power level and sound pressure level are measured from the po-  
sition of the bystander.  
• The complete system consists of the main unit, auto document feeder, 2  
tray paper unit, bridge unit, booklet finisher, and punch kit for the  
booklet finisher.  
❖ Weight:  
Type 1, 2: Approx. 110 kg, 242lb.  
❖ HDD:  
80 GB or more  
• Capacity for Document Server  
36 GB  
• Capacity for memory sorting  
14-16 MB  
• Capacity for others  
8.7 GB or more  
9
285  
Appendix  
Specifications for Options  
❖ Exposure Glass Cover  
Lower this over originals for copying.  
❖ Auto Document Feeder  
Lower this over originals for copying.  
• Mode:  
ADF mode, Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Size mode, Custom Size  
Originals mode, Auto detect (A4, 81/2"×11")  
• Original size:  
A3L-B6JISKL  
Vertical: 128-297mm, 5.1"-11.7"  
Horizontal: 128-432mm, 5.1"-17.3"  
• Maximum number of originals:  
100 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• Dimensions (W×D×H):  
570×520×135mm, 22.8"×20.8"×5.4"  
• Weight:  
Approx. 12kg, 26.4lb.  
❖ 1000-sheet Finisher  
Finisher Upper Tray:  
• Paper siez:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"×18"L,  
11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"KL  
• Paper weight:  
52-260g/m2, 14-69lb.  
9
• Stack capacity:  
• 250 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"×11"KL,  
81/2"×51/2"KL  
• 50 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L  
Finisher Shift Tray:  
• Paper size:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L,  
81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"KL  
• Paper weight:  
52-163g/m2, 14–43lb.  
• Stack capacity:  
No Staple:  
• 1,000 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"KL  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 500 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
286  
 
Specifications for Options  
Staple:  
• 2-9 sheets: 100 sets (A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 10-50 sheets:100–20 sets (A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 2-9 sheets: 100 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 10-50 sheets: 50-10 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 2-9 sheets: 50 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 10-30 sheets: 50-10 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• Staple capacity:  
• 2-30 sheets: A3L B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 2-50 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"KL (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• Staple paper size:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,  
81/2"×11"KL  
• Staple paper weight:  
64-90g/m2, 16-24lb.  
• Staple position  
• 1 staples - 2 positions  
• 2 staples - 2 positions  
• Power consumption:  
50W (power is supplied from the main unit)  
• Dimensions (W×D×H)  
520×520×790mm, 20.8"×20.8"×31.6"  
• Weight:  
9
Approx. 25kg, 55lb.  
❖ 3000-sheet Finisher  
Finisher Upper Tray:  
• Paper siez:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"×18"L,  
11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L  
• Paper weight:  
52-163g/m2, 14-43lb.  
• Stack capacity:  
• 250 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"×11"KL,  
81/2"×51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 50 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
287  
Appendix  
Finisher Shift Tray:  
• Paper size:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"×18"L,  
11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L  
• Paper weight:  
52-256g/m2, 14–68lb.  
• Stack capacity:  
No Staple:  
• 3,000 sheets: A4K, 81/2"×11"K (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 1,500 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, A4L, B5JISKL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L,  
81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 500 sheets: A5K (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 100 sheets: A5L, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"×51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
Staple:  
• 2-19 sheets: 150 sets (A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 20-50 sheets: 150-60(A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 2-14 sheets: 100 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 15-50 sheets:100-30 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 2-14 sheets: 100 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 15-30 sheets: 100-33 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• Staple capacity:  
Without Mixed Size:  
• 50 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"KL (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 30 sheets: A3L B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
9
With Mixed Size:  
• 30 sheets (A3L / A4K, B4JISL / B5JISK, 11"×17"L / 81/2"×11"K)  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• Staple paper size:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,  
81/2"×11"KL  
• Staple paper weight:  
64-90g/m2, 17-24lb.  
• Staple position  
• 1 staples - 3 positions  
• 2 staples - 2 positions  
• Power consumption:  
96W (power is supplied from the main unit)  
• Dimensions (W×D×H)  
657×613×960mm, 26.3"×24.5"×38.4"  
288  
Specifications for Options  
• Weight:  
Approx. 54kg, 119lb.  
❖ Booklet Finisher  
Finisher Upper Tray:  
• Paper siez:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"×18"L,  
11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L  
• Paper weight:  
52-163g/m2, 14-43lb.  
• Stack capacity:  
• 250 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"×11"KL,  
81/2"×51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 50 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
Finisher Shift Tray:  
• Paper size:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"×18"L,  
11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L  
• Paper weight:  
52-256g/m2, 14–67lb.  
• Stack capacity:  
No Staple:  
• 2,000 sheets: A4K, 81/2"×11"K (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 1,000 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, A4L, B5JISKL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L,  
81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 500 sheets: A5K (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 100 sheets: A5L, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"×51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
9
Staple:  
• 2-12 sheets: 150 sets (A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 13-50 sheets: 150-40(A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 2-9 sheets: 100 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 10-50 sheets:100-20 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 2-9 sheets: 100 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 10-30 sheets: 100-33 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
289  
Appendix  
• Staple capacity:  
Without Mixed Size:  
• 50 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"KL (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• 30 sheets: A3L B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
With Mixed Size:  
• 30 sheets (A3L / A4K, B4JISL / B5JISK, 11"×17"L / 81/2"×11"K)  
(80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• Staple paper size:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,  
81/2"×11"KL  
• Staple paper weight:  
64-90g/m2, 17-24lb.  
• Staple position  
• 1 staples - 3 positions  
• 2 staples - 2 positions  
• Saddle stitch  
• Paper size:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4L, B5JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,  
81/2"×11"L  
• Saddle stitching capacity:  
2-15 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• Stack capacity:  
2-5 sheets: 30 sets (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
6-10 sheets: 15 sets (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
11-15 sheets: 10 sets (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• Folding:  
Center folding  
9
• Paper weight:  
64-90g/m2, 17-24lb.  
• Position:  
1 position  
• Power consumption:  
96W (power is supplied from the main unit)  
• Dimensions (W×D×H)  
657×613×960mm, 26.3"×24.5"×38.4"  
• Weight:  
Approx. 63kg, 138.6lb.  
290  
Specifications for Options  
❖ Punch Kit (3000-sheet Finisher / Booklet Finisher)  
• Paper size:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,  
81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"KL  
• Paper weight:  
52-163g/m2, 14-43.4lb.  
• Weight:  
Approx. 2kg, 4.4lb.  
❖ 2 Tray Paper Unit  
• Paper size:  
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5K, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,  
81/2"×11"KL, 81/4"×14"L, 71/4"×101/2"KL, 8"×13"L, 81/2"×13"L,  
81/4"×13"L, 8KL, 16KKL  
• Paper weight:  
60-216g/m2, 16-57lb.  
• Paper capacity:  
1,100 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.) ×2 trays  
• Power consumption:  
Maximum 50W (power is supplied from the main unit)  
• Dimensions (W×D×H):  
580×620×260mm, 22.9"×24.5"×10.3"  
• Weight:  
Approx. 25kg 55.2lb.  
❖ Large Capacity Tray  
• Paper size:  
A4K, 81/2"×11"K  
9
• Paper weight:  
60-105g/m2, 16-28lb.  
• Paper capacity:  
2,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)  
• Power consumption:  
Maximum 50W (power is supplied from the main unit)  
• Dimensions (W×D×H, option unit):  
580×620×260mm, 22.9"×24.5"×10.3"  
• Weight:  
Approx. 25kg, 55.2lb.  
❖ Bridge Unit  
• Dimensions:  
415×412×111mm, 16.4"×16.3"×4.4"  
• Weight:  
Approx. 5kg, 11lb.  
291  
Appendix  
Information about Installed Software  
expat  
• The software including controller, etc. (hereinafter "software") installed on  
this product uses the expat under the conditions mentioned below.  
• The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of  
the product including the expat, and the product manufacturer makes the ini-  
tial developer and copyright holder of the expat, free from these obligations.  
• Information relating to the expat is available at:  
http://expat.sourceforge.net/  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Centre, Ltd. and Clark  
Cooper.  
Copyright © 2001, 2002 Expat maintainers.  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of  
this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the  
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,  
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the  
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, sub-  
ject to the following conditions:  
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all  
copies or substantial portions of the Software.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY  
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WAR-  
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPY-  
RIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIA-  
BILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,  
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR  
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.  
9
NetBSD  
1. Copyright Notice of NetBSD  
For all users to use this product:  
This product contains NetBSD operating system:  
For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not  
in the public domain; its authors retain their copyright.  
The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD  
source code. For exact copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries,  
the source code tree must be consulted.  
A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.  
Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.  
292  
     
Information about Installed Software  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-  
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation  
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
C All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must  
display the following acknowledgment:  
This product includes software developed by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.  
and its contributors.  
D Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contribu-  
tors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  
without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND  
CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-  
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DIS-  
CLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS  
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEM-  
PLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMIT-  
ED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF  
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CON-  
TRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTH-  
ERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,  
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
2.Authors Name List  
9
All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners.  
The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software  
that we have mentioned in this document:  
• This product includes software developed by the University of California,  
Berkeley and its contributors.  
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the NetB-  
SD Project.  
• This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.  
and its contributors.  
• This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.  
• This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.  
• This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.  
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.  
• This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.  
• This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.  
293  
Appendix  
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Hannum.  
• This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt.  
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R.  
Thorpe for the NetBSD Project.  
• This product includes software developed by the University of California,  
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.  
• This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.  
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for  
the NetBSD Project.  
• This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.  
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.  
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.  
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD  
Project.  
• This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.  
• This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the  
NetBSD Project.  
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank  
van der Linden  
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R.  
Thorpe.  
• The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley.  
• This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the Univer-  
sity of California, Berkeley, and contributors.  
Sablotron  
9
Sablotron (Version 0.82) Copyright © 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Re-  
served  
a) The application software installed on this product includes the Sablotron software  
Version 0.82 (hereinafter, "Sablotron 0.82"), with modifications made by the product  
manufacturer. The original code of the Sablotron 0.82 is provided by Ginger Alli-  
ance Ltd., the initial developer, and the modified code of the Sablotron 0.82 has been  
derived from such original code provided by Ginger Alliance Ltd.  
b) The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the application  
software of this product including the Sablotron 0.82 as modified, and the prod-  
uct manufacturer makes Ginger Alliance Ltd., the initial developer of the Sa-  
blotron 0.82, free from these obligations.  
c) The Sablotron 0.82 and the modifications thereof are made available under the  
terms of Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (hereinafter, "MPL 1.1"), and the appli-  
cation software of this product constitutes the "Larger Work" as defined in MPL 1.1.  
The application software of this product except for the Sablotron 0.82 as modified is  
licensed by the product manufacturer under separate agreement(s).  
294  
 
Information about Installed Software  
d) The source code of the modified code of the Sablotron 0.82 is available at: ht-  
tp://support-download.com/services/device/sablot/notice082.html  
e) The source code of the Sablotron software is available at: http://www.ginger-  
all.com  
f) MPL 1.1 is available at: http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html  
JPEG LIBRARY  
• The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the In-  
dependent JPEG Group.  
SASL  
CMU libsasl  
Tim Martin  
Rob Earhart  
Rob Siemborski  
Copyright (c) 2001 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-  
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation  
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
C The name "Carnegie Mellon University" must not be used to endorse or pro-  
mote products derived from this software without prior written permission.  
For permission or any other legal details, please contact:  
9
Office of Technology Transfer  
Carnegie Mellon University  
5000 Forbes Avenue  
Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890  
(412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395  
[email protected]  
D Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowl-  
edgment:  
"This product includes software developed by Computing Services at Carn-  
egie Mellon University (http://www.cmu.edu/computing/)."  
295  
   
Appendix  
CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH  
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CARNEGIE  
MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CON-  
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING  
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF  
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT  
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE.  
MD4  
Copyright (C) 1990-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved.  
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as  
the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material  
mentioning or referencing this software or this function.  
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such  
works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-  
Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.  
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the mer-  
chantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular  
purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.  
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation  
and/or software.  
9
MD5  
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.  
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as  
the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material  
mentioning or referencing this software or this function.  
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such  
works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-  
Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.  
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the mer-  
chantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular  
purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.  
296  
   
Information about Installed Software  
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation  
and/or software.  
Samba(Ver 3.0.4)  
For SMB transmission, this machine uses Samba ver 3.0.4 (hereinafter referred to  
as Samba 3.0.4).  
Copyright © Andrew Tridgell 1994-1998  
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the  
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software  
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.  
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT  
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILI-  
TY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public  
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,  
Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.  
Note  
❒ The source code for SMB transmission by this machine can be downloaded  
from the following website:  
http://support-download.com/services/scbs  
RSA BSAFE®  
9
• This product includes RSA BSAFE® cryptographic or security protocol soft-  
ware from RSA Security Inc.  
• RSA and BSAFE are registered trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
• RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.  
297  
   
Appendix  
Open SSL  
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-  
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or  
other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display  
the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the  
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to en-  
dorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written per-  
mission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].  
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may  
"OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the  
OpenSSL Project.  
9
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowl-  
edgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for  
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  
OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, IN-  
DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-  
AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE  
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS IN-  
TERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEG-  
LIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
298  
 
Information about Installed Software  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young  
([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson  
([email protected]).  
Original SSLeay License  
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-  
soft.com).  
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.  
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the follow-  
ing conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found  
in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL  
code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the  
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).  
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software  
are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific li-  
brary, and patent office worldwide. More information can be found e.g. at "ht-  
tp://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".  
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions  
and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility. You will be responsible for  
any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any claims whether possess-  
ing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any respon-  
sibility on your behalf.  
9
NO WARRANTY  
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO  
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI-  
CABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE  
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PRO-  
GRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED  
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-  
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE  
OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DE-  
FECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, RE-  
PAIR OR CORRECTION.  
299  
Appendix  
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO  
IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY  
WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMIT-  
TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GEN-  
ERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING  
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCU-  
RATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE  
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN  
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSI-  
BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
2)  
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by  
CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.  
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code  
Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.  
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or  
without modification, are permitted provided that this copyright notice is re-  
tained.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLA-  
RY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MIS-  
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
Ariel Futoransky <[email protected]>  
<http://www.core-sdi.com>  
9
3)  
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by  
the University of California, since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley  
code.  
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995  
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-  
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or  
other materials provided with the distribution.  
300  
Information about Installed Software  
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be  
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specif-  
ic prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS  
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-  
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-  
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR  
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON  
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILI-  
TY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN  
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
4)  
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term  
BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:  
Markus Friedl  
Theo de Raadt  
Niels Provos  
Dug Song  
Kevin Steves  
Daniel Kouril  
Wesley Griffin  
Per Allansson  
Jason Downs  
Solar Designer  
Todd C. Miller  
9
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-  
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or  
other materials provided with the distribution.  
301  
Appendix  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EX-  
PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPE-  
CIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW-  
EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CON-  
TRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT-  
WARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
5)  
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses:  
c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)  
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the  
openbsd-compat/ subdirectory are licensed as follows:  
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright  
holders:  
Todd C. Miller  
Theo de Raadt  
Damien Miller  
Eric P. Allman  
9
The Regents of the University of California  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-  
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or  
other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be  
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specif-  
ic prior written permission.  
302  
Information about Installed Software  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS  
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-  
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-  
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR  
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON  
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILI-  
TY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN  
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Open SSH  
The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows. First,  
we will summarize and say that all components are under a BSD licence, or a li-  
cence more free than that.  
OpenSSH contains no GPL code.  
1)  
Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <[email protected]>, Espoo, Finland All rights re-  
served  
As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software can be used  
freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this software must be clearly  
marked as such, and if the derived work is incompatible with the protocol de-  
scription in the RFC file, it must be called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure  
Shell".  
9
[Tatu continues]  
However, I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or copyrights  
held by third parties, and the software includes parts that are not under my di-  
rect control. As far as I know, all included source code is used in accordance with  
the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose (the  
GNU license being the most restrictive); see below for details.  
[However, none of that term is relevant at this point in time. All of these restric-  
tively licenced software components which he talks about have been removed  
from OpenSSH, i.e.,  
- RSA is no longer included, found in the OpenSSL library  
- IDEA is no longer included, its use is deprecated  
303  
 
Appendix  
- DES is now external, in the OpenSSL library  
- GMP is no longer used, and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL  
- Zlib is now external, in a library  
- The make-ssh-known-hosts script is no longer included  
- TSS has been removed  
- MD5 is now external, in the OpenSSL library  
- RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL  
- Blowfish is now external, in the OpenSSL library  
[The licence continues]  
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software  
are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific li-  
brary, and patent office worldwide. More information can be found e.g. at "ht-  
tp://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".  
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions  
and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility. You will be responsible for  
any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any claims whether possess-  
ing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any respon-  
sibility on your behalf.  
NO WARRANTY  
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO  
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI-  
CABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE  
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PRO-  
GRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED  
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-  
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE  
OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DE-  
FECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, RE-  
PAIR OR CORRECTION.  
9
304  
Information about Installed Software  
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO  
IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY  
WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMIT-  
TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GEN-  
ERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING  
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCU-  
RATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE  
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN  
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSI-  
BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
2)  
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by  
CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.  
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code  
Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.  
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or  
without modification, are permitted provided that this copyright notice is re-  
tained.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLA-  
RY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MIS-  
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
Ariel Futoransky <[email protected]>  
<http://www.core-sdi.com>  
9
3)  
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by  
the University of California, since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley  
code.  
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995  
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-  
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or  
other materials provided with the distribution.  
305  
Appendix  
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be  
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specif-  
ic prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS  
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-  
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-  
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR  
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON  
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILI-  
TY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN  
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
4)  
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term  
BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:  
Markus Friedl  
Theo de Raadt  
Niels Provos  
Dug Song  
Kevin Steves  
Daniel Kouril  
Wesley Griffin  
Per Allansson  
Jason Downs  
Solar Designer  
Todd C. Miller  
9
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-  
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or  
other materials provided with the distribution.  
306  
Information about Installed Software  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EX-  
PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPE-  
CIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW-  
EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CON-  
TRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT-  
WARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
5)  
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses:  
c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)  
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the  
openbsd-compat/ subdirectory are licensed as follows:  
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright  
holders:  
Todd C. Miller  
Theo de Raadt  
Damien Miller  
Eric P. Allman  
9
The Regents of the University of California  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-  
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or  
other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be  
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specif-  
ic prior written permission.  
307  
Appendix  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS  
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-  
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-  
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR  
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON  
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILI-  
TY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN  
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Open LDAP  
The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003  
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Soft-  
ware"), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright state-  
ments and notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and  
9
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.  
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each re-  
vision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under  
terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of  
the license.  
308  
 
Information about Installed Software  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND  
ITS CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WAR-  
RANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN-  
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP  
FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S)  
OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDEN-  
TAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUD-  
ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUP-  
TION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE  
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGE.  
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising  
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without  
specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all  
times remain with copyright holders.  
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.  
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California,  
USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of  
this document is granted.  
9
309  
INDEX  
Bidirectional Communication, 63  
Bidirectional SCSI print, 64  
Blank Page Print, 189  
Box Setting, 121  
Box Setting: Print List, 121  
Box Settings, 172  
1 Sided to 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoB, 100  
1 Sided to 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT, 100  
2 Sided Print, 128  
4 Color Graphic Mode, 188  
Bypass Tray Setting Priority, 189  
A
C
About Address Book, 205  
Accessing User Tools, 3  
A.C.S. Priority, 119  
A.C.S. Sensitivity, 119  
Capture Server IP Address, 69  
Center Mark, 128  
Change PDF Password, 197  
Changing a Fax Destination, 226  
Changing a Group Name, 265  
Changing an E-mail Destination, 238  
Changing an FTP Folder Destination, 248  
Changing a Registered Name, 212  
Changing a User Code, 216  
Changing Fax Number, 227  
Changing the Display Language, 276  
Changing the registered SMB Folder  
Destination, 244  
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level, 201  
Address Book: Change Order, 76  
Address Book: Edit Title, 76  
Address Book: Program / Change /  
Delete Group, 76  
Address Book: Switch Title, 76  
Address Book Management, 76  
Adjust Color Image / Copier / Document  
Server Features, 119  
Adjust Sound Volume, 121  
Administrator Authentication  
Management, 76  
Changing the User Parameters, 158  
Channel, 66  
Administrator's E-mail Address, 69  
Administrator Tools / System Settings, 76  
ADS Background (Full Color), 119  
AOF (Always On), 76  
Checkered Mark, 128  
Checking the Wireless LAN Connection  
Clearing the Counter, 222  
Clearing the Number of Prints, 222  
Color Profile, 196, 197  
,
12  
Append CR to LF, 194  
Authentication Information, 214, 270  
Authorized Reception, 160  
Auto Color Calibration, 275  
Auto Continue, 189  
Auto Delete File in Document Server, 76  
Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs, 189  
Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs, 189  
Auto Erase Memory Setting, 76  
Auto Image Density Priority, 91  
Auto Logout Timer, 57  
Color Registration, 275  
Color Sensitivity, 119  
Color Setting, 196, 197  
Communication Mode, 66  
Communication Page Count, 121  
Compression (Black & White), 203  
Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)  
Configuration Page, 185  
,
203  
Connecting the Telephone Line, 45  
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface, 6  
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface, 10  
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface, 9  
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b  
(Wireless LAN) Interface, 11  
Connecting to the Interface, 5  
Connecting to the USB Interface, 8  
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset  
Timer, 57  
Copier / Document Server Features /  
Adjust Color Image, 119  
Copier / Document Server Features /  
Edit, 100  
Auto Off Timer, 57  
Auto Specify Sender Name, 69  
Auto Tray Switching, 91  
B
Background Density of ADS (Full Color)  
Background Numbering, 106  
Back Margin: Left / Right, 100  
Back Margin: Top / Bottom, 100  
Backup File TX Setting, 125  
,
201  
Back Up / Restore Address Book, 76  
310  
 
Copier / Document Server Features /  
General Features, 91  
Displaying the Counter for Each User  
Display Panel, 2  
,
219  
Copier / Document Server Features /  
Input/Output, 116  
Copier / Document Server Features /  
Reproduction Ratio, 96  
Copier / Document Server Features /  
Stamp, 106  
Copies, 189  
Display/Print Counter, 76  
Divide & Send E-mail, 203  
DNS Configuration, 59  
Document Server, 120  
Domain Name, 59  
Domain Name (IEEE 1394), 64  
Double Copies Separation Line, 100  
Duplex, 189  
Duplex Back Page Stamping Position  
(Page Numbering), 113  
Copy Count Display, 47  
Copy on Designating Page in Combine  
,
100  
Copy Order in Combine, 100  
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode, 91  
Counter, 279  
Courier Font, 194  
Cover Sheet Tray, 51  
Customize Function: Copier, 91  
Customize Function: Document Server  
Storage, 91  
E
Edge to Edge Print, 189  
Edit / Copier / Document Server  
Features, 100  
Effective Protocol, 59  
E-mail Communication Port, 69  
E-mail Destination, 236  
E-mail Information Language, 203  
E-mail Reception Interval, 69  
E-mail Storage in Server, 69  
Enable H.323, 134  
D
Data Format, 196  
Data Security for Copying, 76  
Date Stamp, 111  
DDNS Configuration, 59  
DDNS Configuration (IEEE 1394), 64  
Default Printer Language, 189  
Default User Name / Password (Send)  
Delete All Files in Document Server, 76  
Delete All Logs, 76  
Enable SIP, 134  
Energy Saver Timer, 57  
Enhanced Authentication Management  
Erase All Memory, 76  
Erase Border Width, 100  
Erase Center Width, 100  
,
76  
,
69  
Delete All Stored Print Jobs, 188  
Delete All Temporary Print Jobs, 188  
Delete Scanner Journal, 199  
Deleting a Fax Destination, 229  
Deleting a Group, 266  
Erase Original Shadow in Combine, 100  
Error Log, 185  
Ethernet Speed, 59  
Extend A4 Width, 194  
Extended Security, 76  
Deleting a Group Within Another Group 263  
,
Deleting a NCP Folder Destination, 255  
Deleting an E-mail Destination, 239  
Deleting an FTP Folder Destination, 250  
Deleting a Registered Name, 213  
Deleting a scan size, 143  
Deleting a Special Sender, 171  
Deleting a User Code, 218  
Deleting Fax Information, 147  
Deleting Information Boxes, 179  
Deleting Personal Boxes, 175  
Deleting Transfer Boxes, 183  
Delivery Option, 69  
Density (Background Numbering), 106  
Destination List Display Priority 1, 199  
Destination List Display Priority 2, 199  
F
Facsimile Auto Reset Timer, 57  
Facsimile Features / General Features 121  
,
Facsimile Features / Initial Settings, 134  
Facsimile Features / Reception Settings 128  
Facsimile Features / Scan Settings, 124  
Facsimile Features / Send Settings, 125  
Fax Destination, 223, 225  
,
Fax E-mail Account, 69  
Fax RX File Transmission, 69  
File Transfer / System Settings, 69  
Firmware Version, 76  
Folder Destination, 240  
Folder Transfer Result Report, 128  
Font (Date Stamp), 111  
Display/Clear/Print Counter per User  
,
76  
Font Number, 194  
Font (Page Numbering), 113  
Displaying Names Registered in a Group  
,
261  
311  
Font Pitch, 194  
Font Source, 194  
J
Job End Call, 91  
Job Separation, 189  
Format (Date Stamp), 111  
Form Lines, 194  
Forwarding, 128, 148, 161  
Forwarding Mark, 151  
Front Cover Copy in Combine, 100  
Front Margin: Left / Right, 100  
Front Margin: Top / Bottom, 100  
Function Priority, 47  
K
Key Counter Management, 76  
key Repeat, 47  
L
Function Reset Timer, 47  
LAN Type, 59  
LDAP Authentication, 272  
LDAP Search, 76  
Letterhead Setting, 116, 189  
List / Test Print Lock, 188  
G
General Features / Copier / Document  
Server Features, 91  
General Features / Facsimile Features  
,
121  
General Settings / Scanner Features, 199  
General Settings / System Settings, 47  
M
Machine IPv4 Address, 59  
Machine IPv6 Address, 59  
Machine Name, 59  
H
H.323 Settings, 134  
Hex Dump, 185  
High Compression PDF Level, 203  
Host Interface / Printer Features, 193  
Host Name, 59  
Maintenance, 275  
Maintenance / Printer Features, 188  
Max. Copy Quantity, 91  
Max. E-mail Size, 125, 203  
Max. Reception E-mail Size, 69  
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 116  
Memory Lock, 162  
Memory Lock Reception, 128  
Memory Overflow, 189  
Memory Usage, 189  
Host Name (IEEE 1394), 64  
I
IEEE 1394, 64  
IEEE 802.11b, 13, 66  
Image Repeat Separation Line, 100  
Initial Print Job List, 189  
Initial Settings / Facsimile Features, 134  
Input/Output / Copier / Document  
Server Features, 116  
Input Prime, 63  
Inquiry, 277  
Interface Settings / System Settings, 59  
Internet Fax Settings, 134  
Interpreting the configuration page, 186  
I/O Buffer, 193  
Menu List, 185  
Multiple Lists, 185  
N
NCP Delivery Protocol, 59  
Network, 59  
Network Security Level, 76  
Network Settings, 14  
No. of Digits for Single Page Files, 203  
Number of Scanner Resends, 69  
NW Frame Type, 59  
I/O Timeout, 193  
IPv4 Address (IEEE 1394), 64  
IPv4 Gateway Address, 59  
IPv4 over 1394, 64  
IPv6 Gateway Address, 59  
IPv6 Stateless Address  
O
On Hook Mode Release Time, 121  
Orientation, 194  
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine, 100  
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode, 91  
Original Photo Type Priority, 91  
Original Type Display, 91  
Autoconfiguration, 59  
Original Type Priority, 91  
Output: Copier, 47  
312  
Output: Document Server, 47  
Output: Facsimile, 47  
Output: Printer, 47  
Printing the Counter for All User, 221  
Printing the Counter for Each User, 219  
Print List, 67  
Output tray settings, 50  
Print Priority, 47  
Print Reception Time, 128  
Print Scanner Journal, 199  
Program / Change Administrator, 76  
Program / Change / Delete E-mail  
Message, 69  
P
Page Numbering, 113  
Page Numbering in Combine  
(Page Numbering), 113  
Page Numbering Initial Letter, 113  
Page Size, 189  
Panel key Sound, 47  
Panel Off Timer, 57  
Paper Display, 91  
Paper Tray, 128, 162  
Paper Tray Priority: Copier, 51  
Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile, 51  
Paper Tray Priority: Printer, 51  
Paper Type: Bypass Tray, 51  
Paper Type: Tray 1-4, 51  
Parallel Communication Speed, 63  
Parallel Interface, 63  
Parallel Timing, 63  
Parameter Setting, 134  
Parameter Setting: Print List, 134  
Parameter Settings, 152  
Program / Change / Delete Gateway  
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server  
Program / Change/Delete LDAP Server  
,
134  
84  
76  
,
,
Program / Change /  
Delete Scan Size, 124, 141  
Program / Change / Delete Standard  
Message, 125  
Program / Change / Delete User Text, 47  
Program Closed Network Code, 134  
Program/Delete Stamp (User Stamp)  
Program Fax Information, 134  
Program Memory Lock ID, 134  
,
110  
Programming an End Receiver, 149  
Programming/Changing Information  
Boxes, 176  
Programming/changing Personal Boxes  
Programming/Changing Special Senders  
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes  
,
172  
163  
180  
,
,
PCL Config./Font Page, 185  
PCL Menu / Printer Features, 194  
PDF Config./Font Page, 185  
PDF Group Password, 197  
PDF Menu / Printer Features, 197  
Permit SNMPv3 Communication, 59  
Permit SSL/TLS Communication, 59  
Ping Command, 59  
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special  
Sender, 168  
Programming the LDAP server, 85  
Program Special Sender, 128  
Program Special Sender: Print List, 128  
PS Config./Font Page, 185  
PS Menu / Printer Features, 196  
Point Size, 194  
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings, 69  
POP before SMTP, 69  
Q
Quick Operation Key (1-3), 121  
Quitting the forwarding function, 151  
Preset Stamp, 107  
Print Address Book: Destination List, 76  
Print & Delete Scanner Journal, 199  
Printer Auto Reset Timer, 57  
Printer Bypass Paper Size, 51  
Printer Features / Host Interface, 193  
Printer Features / Maintenance, 188  
Printer Features / PCL Menu, 194  
Printer Features / PDF Menu, 197  
Printer Features / PS Menu, 196  
Printer Features / System, 189  
Printer Features / Test Print, 185  
Printer Language, 189  
R
Ratio for Create Margin, 96  
Reception File Print Quantity, 128, 161  
Reception File Setting, 128, 139  
Reception Protocol, 69  
Reception Report e-mail, 140  
Reception Settings / Facsimile Features  
Registering a Fax Destination, 225  
Registering a Group, 257  
Registering a NCP Folder Destination  
Registering an E-mail Destination, 236  
,
128  
,
251  
Print Error Report, 189  
Printing the Box List, 184  
Printing the configuration page, 186  
Registering an FTP Folder Destination  
Registering an SMB Folder Destination  
,
,
246  
240  
313  
Registering a Protection Code to a Group  
User, 269  
Registering a Protection Code to a Single  
User, 267  
Registering a User Code, 215  
Registering Fax Information, 144, 145  
Registering Folders, 240  
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function /  
Ethernet 21  
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function /  
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394) 23  
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function /  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) 24  
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax, 17  
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax /  
Ethernet, 17  
,
,
,
Registering LDAP Authentication  
,
270, 272  
Registering Names, 210  
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax /  
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 18  
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax /  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), 20  
Settings Required to Use Network  
TWAIN Scanner, 31  
Settings Required to Use Network  
TWAIN Scanner / Ethernet, 31  
Settings Required to Use Network  
TWAIN Scanner / IEEE 1394  
(IPv4 over 1394), 32  
Registering Names to a Group, 258  
Registering SMTP Authentication, 270  
Registering user names and destination  
names, 210  
Removing a Name from a Group, 262  
Reproduction Ratio / Copier / Document  
Server Features, 96  
R / E Ratio, 96  
R/E Ratio Priority, 96  
Reserved Job Waiting Time, 189  
Resolution, 194, 196, 197  
Restore Factory Defaults, 66  
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue, 116  
Settings Required to Use Network  
TWAIN Scanner / IEEE 802.11b  
(wireless LAN), 32  
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder  
Function, 25  
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder  
Function / Ethernet, 25  
S
SADF Auto Reset, 116  
Scanner Auto Reset Timer, 57  
Scanner Features / General Settings, 199  
Scanner Features / Scan Settings, 201  
Scanner Features / Send Settings, 203  
Scanner Resend Interval Time, 69  
Scan Settings / Facsimile Features, 124  
Scan Settings / Scanner Features, 201  
SCSI print (SBP-2), 64  
Search Destination, 121, 199  
Security Method, 66  
Select Dial / Push Phone, 134  
Selecting the Telephone Line type, 45  
Selection Signal Status, 63  
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder  
Function / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)  
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder  
Function / IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)  
,
26  
27  
,
Settings Required to Use the Network  
Delivery Scanner, 28  
Settings Required to Use the Network  
Delivery Scanner / Ethernet, 28  
Settings Required to Use the Network  
Delivery Scanner / IEEE 1394  
(IPv4 over 1394), 29  
Settings Required to Use the Network  
Delivery Scanner / IEEE 802.11b  
(wireless LAN), 30  
Settings Required to Use the Printer/  
LAN-Fax, 14  
Select Punch Type, 116  
Send Settings / Facsimile Features, 125  
Send Settings / Scanner Features, 203  
Separation Line in Combine, 100  
Set Date, 57  
Settings Required to Use the Printer/  
LAN-Fax / Ethernet, 14  
Settings Required to Use the Printer/  
Set Time, 57  
Settings for the Document Server, 120  
Settings Required to Use Document  
Server, 33  
Settings Required to Use Document  
Server / Ethernet, 33  
Settings Required to Use Document  
Server / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 34  
Settings Required to Use Document Server /  
LAN-Fax / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)  
,
15  
Settings Required to Use the Printer/  
LAN-Fax / IEEE 802.11b (wireless  
LAN), 16  
Setup IEEE 802.11b, 11  
Setup Wireless LAN, 11  
Shortcut R/E, 96  
Signal Control, 63  
Simplified Screen: Finishing Types, 116  
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)  
,
35  
314  
SIP Settings, 134  
Size (Background Numbering), 106  
Size (Date Stamp), 111  
T
Test Print / Printer Features, 185  
Timer Settings / System Settings, 57  
To enter an identification name, 85  
To enter a port number, 86  
To enter a server name, 85  
To enter the search base, 85  
To enter the user name and password, 87  
Tone: Original Remains, 91  
To set authentication, 86  
To set search conditions, 88  
To set search options, 88  
To start SSL communication, 86  
To test the connection, 87  
Transfer Log Setting, 76  
Transmission Speed, 66  
Tray Paper Settings / System Settings, 51  
Tray Paper Size: Tray 2-4, 51  
Tray Switching, 189  
Size (Page Numbering), 113  
Slip Sheet Tray, 51  
SMB Computer Name, 59  
SMB Work Group, 59  
SMTP Authentication, 69, 270  
SMTP RX File Delivery Settings, 128  
SMTP Server, 69  
Special Senders to Treat Differently, 159  
Specifications, 281  
Specifications for the Main Unit, 281  
Specify Tray for Lines, 128  
SSID Setting, 66  
Stamp Color:1-4 (User Stamp), 110  
Stamp Color (Background Numbering)  
,
106  
Stamp Color (Date Stamp), 111  
Stamp Color (Page Numbering), 113  
Stamp Color (Preset Stamp), 107  
Stamp / Copier / Document Server  
Features, 106  
TWAIN Standby Time, 199  
U
Stamp Format:1-4 (User Stamp), 110  
Stamp Format (Page Numbering), 113  
Stamp Format (Preset Stamp), 107  
Stamp Language (Preset Stamp), 107  
Stamp Position on Designating Page  
(Page Numbering), 113  
Stamp Position (Page Numbering), 113  
Stamp Priority, 107  
Stamp Setting (Date Stamp), 111  
Staple Position, 116  
Stored File E-mail Method, 203  
Stored Reception File User Setting, 128  
Sub Paper Size, 189  
Update Delivery Server Destination List 199  
User Authentication Management, 76  
User Code, 214  
User Stamp, 110  
Using a Fax Destination as a sender, 227  
Using SMB to Connect, 240  
,
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings  
,
36  
W
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass  
Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF  
,
201  
201  
,
Superimpose (Date Stamp), 111  
Superimpose (Page Numbering), 113  
Switch Reception Mode, 128  
Switch Title, 121, 199  
Warm-Up Beeper, 47  
WINS Configuration, 59  
WINS Configuration (IEEE 1394), 64  
Wireless LAN Signal, 66  
Switch to Batch, 116  
Symbol Set, 194  
System Auto Reset Timer, 57  
System / Printer Features, 189  
System Settings / Administrator Tools  
,
76  
System Settings / File Transfer, 69  
System Settings / General Features, 47  
System Settings / Timer Settings, 57  
System Settings / Tray Paper Settings, 51  
System Status/Job List Display Time, 47  
315  
EN  
USA  
B222-7857  
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:  
a means POWER ON.  
c means STAND BY.  
Trademarks  
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
Acrobat® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.  
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their  
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.  
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:  
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95  
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98  
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)  
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:  
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server  
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server  
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional  
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:  
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional  
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition  
The product names of Windows Server™ 2003 are as follows:  
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Web Edition  
The product names of Windows® NT are as follows:  
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0  
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0  
Copyright © 2006  
Type for C3535/DSc535/LD435c/Aficio MP C3500  
Type for C4540/DSc545/LD445c/Aficio MP C4500  
Type for C4540g/DSc545g/Aficio MP C4500G  
EN USA B222-7857  

Metrologic Instruments Focuse Is1650 User Manual
Murphy Iguard Sae J1939 User Manual
Psc Falcon 315 User Manual
Savin 2345 User Manual
Sharp Al 1600 User Manual
Stoptech Automobile Parts 98 180 1470 User Manual
Toshiba Air Conditioner Rav Sm454mut Tr User Manual
Toshiba B Sx8t Series User Manual
Toyota 250 4211 User Manual
Turtle Beach Sony Ss V831ed User Manual